EBLQ-CV3_EDLQ-CV3_4PEN405544-1A
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
EBLQ05+07CAV3 EDLQ05+07CAV3 EKCB07CAV3 EK2CB07CAV3 EKMBUHCA3V3 EKMBUHCA9W1
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
English
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
5.7
1 General safety precautions
1.1
1.2
About the documentation ..........................................................
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
For the installer..........................................................................
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
2 About the documentation
2.1
2.2
About this document..................................................................
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
3 About the box
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
3.2.2
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
Control box ................................................................................
3.3.1
To unpack the control box...........................................
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the control box ........
Option box .................................................................................
3.4.1
To unpack the option box............................................
3.4.2
To remove the accessories from the option box .........
Backup heater ...........................................................................
3.5.1
To unpack the backup heater .....................................
3.5.2
To remove the accessories from the backup heater...
4 About the units and options
4.1
4.2
4.3
Overview: About the units and options......................................
Identification ..............................................................................
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit .................................
4.2.2
Identification label: Control box...................................
4.2.3
Identification label: Option box....................................
4.2.4
Identification label: Backup heater ..............................
Combining units and options .....................................................
4.3.1
Possible combinations of outdoor unit and options.....
4.3.2
Possible options for the outdoor unit...........................
4.3.3
Possible options for the control box ............................
4.3.4
Possible options for the option box .............................
4.3.5
Possible combinations of outdoor unit and domestic
hot water tank .............................................................
5 Application guidelines
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
Setting up the space heating/cooling system ............................
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
5.4.1
System layout – Standalone DHW tank......................
5.4.2
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply ............................
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation ........................................
Installer reference guide
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6 Preparation
6.1
6.2
6.3
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
6.4
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
12
12
12
13
13
15
17
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
23
Overview: Preparation................................................................
Preparing installation site ...........................................................
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit .........
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates ........................................
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the control box...........
6.2.4
Installation site requirements of the option box............
6.2.5
Installation site requirements of the backup heater .....
Preparing water piping ...............................................................
6.3.1
Water circuit requirements ...........................................
6.3.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel prepressure .......................................................................
6.3.3
To check the water volume and flow rate ....................
6.3.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel....
6.3.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................
Preparing electrical wiring ..........................................................
6.4.1
About preparing electrical wiring..................................
6.4.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply ...................
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ......................................................................
6.4.3
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators .........................................................
7 Installation
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
12
12
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................. 23
5.6.3
Power limitation process .............................................. 23
Setting up an external temperature sensor ................................ 24
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Overview: Installation .................................................................
Opening the units .......................................................................
7.2.1
About opening the units ...............................................
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit..............................................
7.2.3
To open the switch box cover of the outdoor unit ........
7.2.4
To open the control box ...............................................
7.2.5
To open the option box ................................................
7.2.6
To open the backup heater ..........................................
7.2.7
To open the switch box cover of the backup heater ....
Mounting the outdoor unit...........................................................
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit..................................
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...............
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure .............................
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit.............................................
7.3.5
To provide drainage .....................................................
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ...............
Mounting the control box ............................................................
7.4.1
About mounting the control box ...................................
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the control box ................
7.4.3
To install the control box ..............................................
Mounting the option box .............................................................
7.5.1
About mounting the option box ....................................
7.5.2
Precautions when mounting the option box .................
7.5.3
To install the option box ...............................................
Mounting the backup heater.......................................................
7.6.1
About mounting the backup heater ..............................
7.6.2
Precautions when mounting the backup heater...........
7.6.3
To install the backup heater.........................................
Connecting the water piping.......................................................
7.7.1
About connecting the water piping...............................
7.7.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............
7.7.3
To connect the water piping.........................................
7.7.4
To connect the water piping to the backup heater .......
7.7.5
To protect the water circuit against freezing ................
7.7.6
To fill the water circuit ..................................................
7.7.7
To fill the domestic hot water tank ...............................
7.7.8
To insulate the water piping .........................................
Connecting the electrical wiring..................................................
7.8.1
About connecting the electrical wiring..........................
7.8.2
About electrical compliance .........................................
7.8.3
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring ......
24
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Table of Contents
7.8.4
7.8.5
7.8.6
7.8.7
7.8.8
7.8.9
7.8.10
7.8.11
7.8.12
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring .......
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
To connect the main power supply .............................
To connect the user interface .....................................
To connect the shut-off valve......................................
To connect the domestic hot water pump ...................
To connect the electrical wiring on the control box .....
To connect the control box power supply ...................
To connect the interconnection cable between
control box and outdoor unit .......................................
7.8.13 To connect the electrical wiring on the option box ......
7.8.14 To connect the option box power supply ....................
7.8.15 To connect the interconnection cable between option
box and control box.....................................................
7.8.16 To connect the electrical meters .................................
7.8.17 To connect the power consumption digital inputs .......
7.8.18 To connect the alarm output .......................................
7.8.19 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF
output ..........................................................................
7.8.20 To connect the changeover to external heat source...
7.8.21 To connect the electrical wiring on the backup heater
7.8.22 To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
7.8.23 To connect the backup heater kit to the control box ...
Finishing the outdoor unit installation ........................................
7.9.1
To close the outdoor unit ............................................
Finishing the control box installation .........................................
7.10.1 To close the control box..............................................
Finishing the option box installation ..........................................
7.11.1 To close the option box...............................................
Finishing the backup heater installation ....................................
7.12.1 To close the backup heater.........................................
8 Configuration
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box.................
8.1.2
To access the most used commands .........................
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first to the
second user interface..................................................
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to the second
user interface ..............................................................
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after first power
ON...............................................................................
Basic configuration ....................................................................
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date.....................
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard...............................................
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options .................................................
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy metering) ...............
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control.....................................
8.2.6
Domestic hot water control .........................................
8.2.7
Contact/helpdesk number ...........................................
Advanced configuration/optimization.........................................
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation: advanced ...............
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced........................
8.3.3
Heat source settings ...................................................
8.3.4
System settings...........................................................
Menu structure: Overview user settings ....................................
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
9 Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
Checklist before commissioning................................................
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
9.4.3
To perform a test run ..................................................
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
10 Hand-over to the user
10.1
40
40
41
42
43
44
44
44
11 Maintenance and service
11.1
11.2
44
45
45
11.3
45
45
46
46
12.1
12.2
12.3
49
49
49
50
50
51
51
51
51
51
53
55
56
60
60
60
60
64
68
70
74
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
12.4
13.1
13.2
13.3
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
81
81
81
81
82
82
83
83
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
86
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 86
To pump down............................................................................ 86
To start and stop forced cooling ................................................. 87
14 Technical data
14.1
14.2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
Overview: Troubleshooting.........................................................
Precautions when troubleshooting .............................................
Solving problems based on symptoms.......................................
12.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as
expected ......................................................................
12.3.2 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating)..............................
12.3.3 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) .......
12.3.4 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens..................
12.3.5 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks .........
12.3.6 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................
12.3.7 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusual high..............................................
12.3.8 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank ..........................................................
12.3.9 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error).....................................
12.3.10 Symptom: The energy metering (produced heat) is
NOT working correctly .................................................
Solving problems based on error codes.....................................
12.4.1 Error codes: Overview .................................................
13 Disposal
80
80
80
80
80
Overview: Maintenance and service ..........................................
Maintenance safety precautions.................................................
11.2.1 Opening the outdoor unit .............................................
11.2.2 Opening the control box...............................................
11.2.3 Opening the option box................................................
11.2.4 Opening the backup heater..........................................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit .................
12 Troubleshooting
46
46
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
About locking and unlocking...................................................... 80
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Possible function locks ...............................................................
To check if locking is active........................................................
To activate or deactivate a function lock ....................................
To activate or deactivate button lock..........................................
88
Overview: Technical data ........................................................... 88
Dimensions and service space................................................... 88
14.2.1 Dimensions and service space: Outdoor unit .............. 88
14.2.2 Dimensions and service space: Options...................... 89
Center of gravity ......................................................................... 91
14.3.1 Center of gravity: Outdoor unit..................................... 91
14.3.2 Center of gravity: Options ............................................ 92
Components ............................................................................... 93
14.4.1 Components: Outdoor unit........................................... 93
14.4.2 Components: Switch box (outdoor unit)....................... 94
14.4.3 Components: Options .................................................. 95
14.4.4 Components: Switch box (options) .............................. 97
Piping diagram ........................................................................... 98
14.5.1 Piping diagram: Outdoor unit ....................................... 98
Wiring diagram ........................................................................... 99
14.6.1 Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit ....................................... 99
Technical specifications ............................................................. 107
14.7.1 Technical specifications: Outdoor unit .........................107
14.7.2 Technical specifications: Options.................................110
Operation range ......................................................................... 111
14.8.1 Operation range: Heating and cooling .........................111
14.8.2 Operation range: Domestic hot water ..........................112
ESP curve .................................................................................. 113
14.9.1 ESP curve: Outdoor unit ..............................................113
15 Glossary
114
16 Field settings table
115
Installer reference guide
3
1 General safety precautions
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
WARNING
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide must be
performed by an authorized installer.
1.1.1
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
WARNING
Meaning of warnings and symbols
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminum fins of the unit.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
NOTICE
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information must be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
INFORMATION
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
1.2
For the installer
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
1.2.1
General
1.2.2
If you are not sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
NOTICE
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by Daikin.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated.
WARNING
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the Daikin documentation).
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
CAUTION
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
Installer reference guide
4
Installation site
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
1 General safety precautions
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
A siphon tube is NOT present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
NOTICE
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are not
subjected to stress.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
CAUTION
WARNING
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
immediately. If the valve is not closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
WARNING
WARNING
Always recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
NOTICE
WARNING
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
WARNING
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant must be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
WARNING
1.2.5
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
If
A siphon tube is present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
5
2 About the documentation
1.2.6
Electrical
2
About the documentation
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
2.1
About this document
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
Authorised installers
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
Target audience
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, shall be installed in the fixed wiring.
WARNING
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
▪ All field wiring must be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do not come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
Install power cables at least 1 metre away from televisions or radios
to prevent interference. Depending on the radio waves, a distance of
1 metre may not be sufficient.
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Control box installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the control box)
▪ Option box installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the option box)
▪ Backup heater installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the backup heater)
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, technical specifications, good
practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/supportand-manuals/product-information/
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit) + Digital files on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/productinformation/
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional Daikin website or via your dealer.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
2.2
Installer reference guide at a
glance
Chapter
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
NOTICE
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
Installer reference guide
6
Description
General safety
precautions
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
3 About the box
Chapter
Description
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
Technical data
Specifications of the system
Glossary
Definition of terms
Field settings table
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
1
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
3
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor unit, control box, and/or backup heater are delivered on-site.
2
3.2.2
1
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
Open the outdoor unit.
It contains information about:
3×
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit must be checked for damage. Any damage
must be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
5×
2
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Remove the accessories.
Installer reference guide
7
3 About the box
a
b
1×
c
1×
d
1×
1×
2
Remove the accessories.
a
b
2×
e
f
2×
2×
3.3
2×
2×
General safety precautions
Addendum book for optional equipment
Outdoor unit installation manual
Operation manual
Sealing ring for shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Unit mounting plate
3.4
NOTICE
▪ Option box EK2CB07CAV3 is an option and can only
be used in combination with outdoor units
EDLQ05+07CAV3 and EBLQ05+07CAV3.
▪ To be able to use the option box, it is required that
optional control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the
system.
NOTICE
Control box EKCB07CAV3 is an option and can only be
used in combination with outdoor units EDLQ05+07CAV3
and EBLQ05+07CAV3.
M4 bolts for user interface
M4 nuts for user interface
Wires for domestic hot water booster heater relay
Option box
Control box
3.3.1
c
g
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
2×
3.4.1
To unpack the option box
1
To unpack the control box
1
2
2
3.4.2
3.3.2
1
To remove the accessories from the
control box
1
Open the option box.
2
Remove the accessories.
Open the control box.
Installer reference guide
8
To remove the accessories from the
option box
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
4 About the units and options
a
2×
a
3.5
Connectors for interconnection cable between the option
box and control box EKCB07CAV3.
Backup heater
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
This chapter contains information about:
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
▪ Identifying the control box
NOTICE
3.5.1
▪ Identifying the backup heater
▪ The backup heater is an option and can only be used in
combination with outdoor units EDLQ05+07CAV3 and
EBLQ05+07CAV3.
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
▪ To be able to use the backup heater, it is required that
optional control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the
system.
▪ Possible combinations of outdoor unit and control box
▪ Combining the control box with options
4.2
Identification
To unpack the backup heater
NOTICE
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
1
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
Location
2
Model identification
Example: E B/D L Q 05 CA V3
Code
3.5.2
1
To remove the accessories from the
backup heater
Remove the wall bracket from the box.
Explanation
E
Monobloc outdoor heat pump
B
Reversible (heating+cooling)
D
Heating only
L
Low water temperature – ambient zone: −10~
−25°C
Q
Refrigerant R410A
05
Capacity class
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.2
Identification label: Control box
Location
Model identification
Example: EK CB 07 CA V3
Code
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Description
EK
European kit
CB
Control box
Installer reference guide
9
4 About the units and options
Code
Description
07
Capacity class
Model identification
CA
Model series
Example: EK M BUH CA 3 V3
V3
Power supply
4.2.3
Code
Identification label: Option box
Location
Model identification
Example: EK 2 CB 07 CA V3
Code
Description
EK
European kit
2
Optional
CB
Control box
07
Capacity class
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.4
Explanation
EK
European kit
M
Designed for Monobloc
BUH
Backup heater
CA
Model series
3
Capacity of heater kit (kW)
V3
Power supply
4.3
Combining units and options
4.3.1
Possible combinations of outdoor unit
and options
a
b
c
d e
d
g
f
i
Identification label: Backup heater
Location
FHL1
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Option
FHL2
FHL3
Outdoor unit (EBLQ05+07CAV3 or EDLQ05+07CAV3)
Refrigerant part of the outdoor unit
Hydro part of the outdoor unit
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
Backup heater kit (EKMBUHCA3V3 or EKMBUHCA9W1)
Control box EKCB07CAV3
Option box EK2CB07CAV3
Domestic hot water tank
Space heating circuit
System components required for that option
Outdoor unit
EBLQ05+07CAV3 or
EDLQ05+07CAV3
Control box
EKCB07CAV3
Option box
EK2CB07CAV3
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
Optional equipment
User interface (EKRUCBL*) O
(mandatory)
Simplified user interface
(EKRUCBS)
O
Domestic hot water tank
O
Remote outdoor sensor
(EKRSCA1)
O
PC configurator
(EKPCCAB)
O
Room thermostat
(EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
O
O
Remote sensor for wireless O
thermostat (EKRTETS)
O
Heat pump convector
(FWXV)
O
O
Backup heater kit
(EKMBUHCA3V3,
EKMBUHCA9W1)
O
O
Remote indoor sensor
(KRCS01-1)
O
O
O
O(a)
O
Field-supplied components
Installer reference guide
10
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
4 About the units and options
Option
System components required for that option
Outdoor unit
EBLQ05+07CAV3 or
EDLQ05+07CAV3
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
Control box
EKCB07CAV3
Option box
EK2CB07CAV3
O
Preferential kWh rate
O
power supply (voltage‑free
contact)
O
Domestic hot water pump
O
O
Electric meter
O
O
O
Power consumption digital
inputs
O
O
O
Alarm output
O
O
O
Space cooling/heating ON/ O
OFF output
O
O
Changeover to external
heat source
O
O
(a)
4.3.2
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
O
Only for EBLQ05+07CAV3.
Possible options for the outdoor unit
User interface (EKRUCBL*)
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
The additional user interface can be connected:
▪ To have both:
▪ The simplified user interface acts as room thermostat and needs
to be installed in the room that you want it to control.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the simplified user interface.
Domestic hot water tank
For providing domestic hot water, a domestic hot water tank can be
connected to the outdoor unit.
▪ control close to the control box,
The domestic hot water tank is available in 2 types:
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
▪ Stainless steel tank (EKHWS and EKHWSU (only for UK))
There are 3 types available: 150, 200, and 300 litre.
To have an interface containing other languages.
Following user interfaces are available:
▪ EKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
▪ EKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
▪ Enamelled tank (EKHWE and EKHWET (wallmounted version))
There are 3 types of EKHWE: 150, 200, and 300 litre.
There is 1 type of EKHWET: 150 litre.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank and addendum book for optional equipment.
INFORMATION
▪ EKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
▪ The domestic hot water tank can only be connected if
control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system.
▪ EKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
▪ The domestic hot water tank is connected to the hydro
part of the outdoor unit, and wired to control box
EKCB07CAV3.
▪ EKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
▪ EKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
▪ EKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
For installation instructions, see "7.8.7 To connect the user
interface" on page 42.
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the user interface to the control box.
Simplified user interface (EKRUCBS)
▪ The simplified user interface can only be used in combination with
the main user interface.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor and the addendum book for optional equipment.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump
convectors (FWXV).
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
Installer reference guide
11
5 Application guidelines
4.3.3
Possible options for the control box
User interface (EKRUCBL*)
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
The additional user interface can be connected:
▪ To have both:
▪ control close to the control box,
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
To have an interface containing other languages.
Following user interfaces are available:
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
outdoor unit (or that of control box EKCB07CAV3) and a PC. It gives
the possibility to upload different language files to the user interface,
and parameters to the outdoor unit. For the available language files,
contact your local dealer.
The software and corresponding operating instructions are available
on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/softwaredownloads/.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable, the "8 Configuration" on page 49 chapter, and the addendum
book for optional equipment.
4.3.4
Possible options for the option box
▪ EKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
▪ EKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room
temperature sensor.
▪ EKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure
the room temperature on another location.
▪ EKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
The remote indoor sensor is connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. For installation instructions, see the installation
manual of the remote indoor sensor and the addendum book for
optional equipment.
▪ EKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
INFORMATION
▪ EKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
▪ EKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the
user interface is configured with room thermostat
functionality.
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor
or the remote outdoor sensor.
For installation instructions, see "7.8.7 To connect the user
interface" on page 42.
4.3.5
Possible combinations of outdoor unit
and domestic hot water tank
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the user interface to the control box.
Simplified user interface (EKRUCBS)
▪ The simplified user interface can only be used in combination with
the main user interface.
Outdoor unit
EKHWS
EKHWSU
EKHWE
EKHWET
EBLQ05CAV3
O
O
O
O
EBLQ07CAV3
O
O
O
O
EDLQ05CAV3
O
O
O
O
EDLQ07CAV3
O
O
O
O
INFORMATION
▪ The simplified user interface acts as room thermostat and needs
to be installed in the room that you want it to control.
▪ The domestic hot water tank can only be connected if
control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the simplified user interface.
▪ The domestic hot water tank is connected to the hydro
part of the outdoor unit, and wired to control box
EKCB07CAV3.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to control box
EKCB07CAV3.This thermostat can either be wired (EKRTWA) or
wireless (EKRTR1).
Domestic hot water tank
5
Application guidelines
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the Daikin heat pump system.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Installer reference guide
12
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
b
c
NOTICE
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 49.
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, that is
connected to control box EKCB07CAV3. Possible installations:
▪ Control box EKCB07CAV3 is installed in the room and the user
interface is used as room thermostat.
▪ Control box EKCB07CAV3 is installed indoors, close to the
outdoor unit + user interface installed in the room and used as
room thermostat.
Configuration
Setting
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Setting up the power consumption
▪ Code: [C-07]
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
Setting up the space heating/
cooling system
The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one
or more rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
▪ How many rooms are heated (or cooled) by the Daikin heat pump
system?
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, Daikin
recommends to follow the setup guidelines below.
NOTICE
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Cost effective. You do NOT need an additional external room
thermostat.
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set auto emergency [A.5.1.2] to 1.
5.2.1
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ Setting up the energy metering
5.2
Control box
Backup heater (option)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Setup
Single room
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
A
B
Setup
c
A
B
b
c
b
A
B
a
a
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface used as room thermostat
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
A
B
a
b
c
d
e
d
e
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
Wireless external room thermostat
Installer reference guide
13
5 Application guidelines
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment EKRTR1).
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Configuration
▪ Code: [C-07]
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
Benefits
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Stylish.
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Comfort. In case of under floor heating, the wireless external
room thermostat prevents condensation on the floor during cooling
operation by measuring the room humidity.
▪ Space heating is provided by:
Heat pump convectors
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The
under floor heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
Setup
▪ The under floor heating
▪ The heat pump convectors
Setup
A
B
A
B
c
c
M1
b
b
d
a
A
B
a
b
c
d
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
d
a
A
B
a
b
c
d
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the outdoor
unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2).
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the under floor
heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling
operation.
The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X8M/6 and X8M/7).
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
Installer reference guide
14
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
▪ The space operation mode is sent by one digital output (X8M/6
and X8M/7) on control box EKCB07CAV3 to:
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as thermostat.
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ The shut-off valve
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
INFORMATION
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
Configuration
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Setting
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Unit temperature control:
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
Benefits
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
Altherma LT.
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
▪ The excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating
▪ The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors
5.2.2
▪ Cost effective.
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
Setup
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
c
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface connected to
control box EKCB07CAV3, or an external room thermostat), while
the other rooms are controlled by so-called thermostatic valves (field
supply), which open or close depending on the room temperature.
Setup
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
C
M1
M2
a
e
d
e
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Bypass valve
External room thermostat
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
A
B
C
c
T
b
a
A
B
C
a
b
c
b
A
B
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.3 Preparing water
piping" on page 26.
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the space operation
mode of the additional user interfaces (used as room thermostat)
must be set to match that of the main user interface.
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, and
do NOT have to be connected to the outdoor unit. The outdoor
unit will supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to
program a leaving water schedule.
Installer reference guide
15
5 Application guidelines
Benefits
Configuration
Setting
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Setup
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
A
B
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
c
Heat pump convectors
Setup
C
M1
M1
b
A
B
C
b
d
a
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode.
▪ The heating demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on control box
EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2). The outdoor unit will only
supply leaving water temperature when there is an actual
demand.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
e
a
c
d
d
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
External room thermostat
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the outdoor unit – or to the
backup heater, if there is one.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: Two shut-off valves (field
supply) are installed before the under floor heating:
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has
no heating demand
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during
cooling operation of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the operation mode
of each external room thermostat and heat pump convector
remote controller must be set to match that of the main user
interface.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Setting
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Unit temperature control:
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Installer reference guide
16
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
Setting
INFORMATION
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
▪ For the main zone:
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat.
In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating,
and the highest design temperature in cooling
▪ Additional zone = The other zone
NOTICE
NOTICE
Daikin is NOT responsible for the operation of the mixing
valve station pump. It is the responsibility of the installer to
guarantee pump operation.
▪ For the additional zone:
If there are two leaving water temperature zones, and an
external room thermostat is used, then cooling operation is
NOT possible.
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
CAUTION
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving
water temperature when the additional zone has demand.
Typical example:
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on control
box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2). The outdoor unit will
only supply the desired additional leaving water temperature
when there is an actual demand.
Living room (main zone)
Under floor heating: 35°C
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the operation mode
of each heat pump convector remote controller must be set to
match that of the main user interface.
Bed rooms (additional zone)
Heat pump convectors: 45°C
Configuration
Room (zone)
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Setting
Setup
Unit temperature control:
A
B
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
C
▪ Code: [C-07]
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Note:
▪ Main room = user interface
used as room thermostat
functionality
f
d
A
B
C
D
E
a
b
c
d
e
f
e
f
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
D
E
1 (2 LWT zones): Main +
additional
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
c
▪ Code: [7-02]
b
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
External room thermostat for the
heat pump convector can only
additional zone:
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ #: [A.2.2.5]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
▪ Code: [C-06]
Additional leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 3
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Pressure-regulating valve
Mixing valve station
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
a
Shut‑off valve
If the main zone must be shut off
during cooling mode to prevent
condensation on the floor, set it
accordingly.
At the mixing valve station
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature for heating
and/or cooling.
Installer reference guide
17
5 Application guidelines
Benefits
▪ Comfort.
a
b
c
i
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
d
e
j
k
f
▪ Efficiency.
h
▪ Depending on the demand, the outdoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
m
n
g
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with Altherma LT.
5.3
l
M
d
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors.
j
k
p
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
o
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The outdoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the outdoor unit or
the auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the outdoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the outdoor unit.
INFORMATION
For bivalent operation to be possible, the system requires
control box EK2CB07CAV3.
INFORMATION
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat pump operates to achieve the desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weatherdependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
Setup
▪ Integrate the boiler as follows:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater (option)
Control box
User interface
Option box
Motorised 3‑way valve (delivered with the domestic hot
water tank)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shut‑off valve (field supply)
Collector (field supply)
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
Aquastat valve (field supply)
Domestic hot water tank (option)
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already pre-mounted in the outdoor unit.
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Connect X8M/3 and X8M/4 (changeover to external heat source)
on option box EK2CB07CAV3 to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating/
cooling system" on page 13.
Configuration
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
Installer reference guide
18
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
outdoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
5.4.1
System layout – Standalone DHW tank
a
b
c
h
d
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
k
M
e
d
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating/cooling system" on page 13).
FHL1
f
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
g
▪ A manually operated contact
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FHL1...3
▪ …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
L
Com
Control box
X2M
1 4
Outdoor/Auto/Boiler
A
K1A
N
BTI
A
H
K1A
K2A
Outdoor
Auto
Boiler
Control box
K2A
FHL3
i
▪ An electricity tariff contact
H
FHL2
j
K1A
BTI
X Y
K2A
Boiler thermostat input
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
Auxiliary relay for activation of outdoor unit (field supply)
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Outdoor unit
Automatic
Boiler
Control box
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
outdoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
5.4.2
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater (option)
Control box
User interface
Motorised 3‑way valve
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Collector (field supply)
Under floor heating
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank.
Possible DHW tank volumes
Type
Standalone DHW tank
Possible volumes
▪ 150 l
▪ 200 l
▪ 300 l
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the heat pump can increase this
temperature. However, this consumes more energy. Daikin
recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature below
55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
19
5 Application guidelines
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
Daikin recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, Daikin recommends
to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. When you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, Daikin recommends to produce the domestic
hot water during the night when there is lower space heating
demand.
Determining the DHW consumption
▪ For more information about:
▪ Optimizing the energy consumption for producing domestic hot
water, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring of the domestic hot water tank
to control box EKCB07CAV3, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
▪ Connecting the water piping of the domestic hot water tank to
the outdoor unit, see the installation manual of the domestic hot
water tank.
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water
Setup
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using the typical water
volumes:
Question
How many showers are needed
per day?
d
b
Typical water volume
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
g
c
a
How many baths are needed per 1 bath = 150 l
day?
e
h
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Are there any other domestic hot —
water needs?
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day is
as follows:
▪ 3 showers
f
Outdoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water pump
Control box
Shower
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
Example
▪ For more information about the recirculation connection, see
"7.8.9 To connect the domestic hot water pump" on page 44, and
the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
Configuration
If:
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
▪ V2=180 l
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V1=280 l
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection
If:
▪ V1=480 l
Setup
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
h
Then V2=307 l
V1
V2
T2
T1
5.4.3
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
DHW tank temperature
Cold water temperature
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ Electrical booster heater
b
h
c
a
d
i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
f
e g
Outdoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water pump
Heater element
Non‑return valve
Shower
Cold water
Control box
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
Installer reference guide
20
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
▪ The temperature of the DHW tank can be set to maximum 70°C. If
the applicable legislation requires a higher temperature for
disinfection, you can connect a DHW pump and heater element as
shown above.
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
▪ For more information about the recirculation connection, see
"7.8.9 To connect the domestic hot water pump" on page 44, and
the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
Configuration
The outdoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
5.5
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
▪ Produced heat
▪ Consumed energy
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ For space heating
INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example: for backup heater) and measuring the
consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so,
the energy data will be invalid.
Calculating the consumed energy
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the booster heater and the optional backup
heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for:
▪ The optional backup heater (step 1 and step 2)
▪ The booster heater
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ For space cooling
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ For domestic hot water production
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ Per month
▪ Per year
5.5.1
▪ For the specifications of each type of meter, see "14 Technical
data" on page 88.
▪ When using electrical power meters, set the number of pulses/
kWh for each power meter via the user interface.
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
Produced heat
INFORMATION
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
General rule
INFORMATION
Setup
If glycol is present in the system ([E‑0D]=1]), then the
produced heat will NOT be calculated, nor will it be
displayed on the user interface.
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
▪ The power consumption of the booster heater (if applicable) in
the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ No additional equipment needed.
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
▪ Connect the power meter to X2M/7 and X2M/8 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
Power meter type
In case of…
Use a… power meter
Backup heater supplied from a
Single-phase
single-phase grid (i.e. the backup
heater model is *3V or *9W
connected to a single-phase grid)
In other cases (i.e. a *9W backup Three-phase
heater model connected to a
three-phase grid)
▪ Only in case a booster heater is present in the system, measure
its capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface. Example: If you measure a booster heater
resistance of 17.1Ω, the capacity of the heater at 230 V is
3100 W.
5.5.2
Consumed energy
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
21
5 Application guidelines
Setup
Example
Single-phase power meter
0 0 58
Three-phase power meter
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X2M/7 and X2M/8 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X2M/9 and X2M/10 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
0 5
1 0
a
Power meter types
▪ Power meter 1: Single-phase power meter.
b
c
b


c
c
▪ Power meter 2:
c
d
▪ In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a
single-phase power meter.
▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
d
A
e
B
g
f
C
D
h
E
e
A
g
f
B
C
h
D
i
E
A Outdoor unit
A Outdoor unit
B Control box
B Control box
C DHW tank
C DHW tank
D Option box
D Option box
E Backup heater kit
E Backup heater kit
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
d Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
e Control box (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/N)
f Booster heater (L1/N)
f Control box (L1/N)
g Option box (L1/N)
g Booster heater (L1/N)
h Backup heater (L1/N)
h Option box (L1/N)
Example
Three-phase backup heater:
0 0 58
e
g
A
h
B
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X2M/9 and X2M/10 of
option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 22 for
an example with two power meters.
Preferential kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the refrigerant part of the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. the hydro part of the
outdoor unit, control box EKCB07CAV3, option box
EK2CB07CAV3, the backup heater kit, and the optional booster
heater).
Installer reference guide
5.6


b
d
f
b
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
0 5
1 0
e
A
B
C
D
E
a
Exception
22
a
c
i Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
5.5.4
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
i
j
k
C
D
E
Outdoor unit
Control box
Domestic hot water tank
Option box
Backup heater kit
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
Power meter (L1/N)
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
Fuse (L1/N)
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
Control box (L1/N)
Booster heater (L1/N)
Option box (L1/N)
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of the outdoor unit, control box EKCB07CAV3, option box
EK2CB07CAV3, the backup heater kit, and the optional booster
heater).
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
▪ Permanently
▪ By digital inputs
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
5 Application guidelines
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
Pi
DI
A
B
C
D
b
a
F
b
A
B
C
D
E
F
a
b
c
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Power input
Time
Digital input (power limitation level)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Pi
Setup and configuration
DI1
▪ No additional equipment needed.
DI3
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the
user interface (for the description of all settings, see
"8 Configuration" on page 49):
b
DI4
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
NOTICE
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to
guarantee defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is
interrupted several times, the heat exchanger will
freeze up.
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3 kW to
guarantee space heating and DHW production by
allowing at least one electrical heater (backup heater
step 1 or booster heater).
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
a
a
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
Mind the following guidelines when selecting the desired
power limitation level:
c
Outdoor unit
Control box
Option box
Backup heater kit
Domestic hot water tank
Energy management system
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
Backup heater
Booster heater
▪ Select full time limitation mode
5.6.2
E
X2M
Power input
Time
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Setup
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are
corresponding power limitation level:
used
to
activate
the
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
Configuration
Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the user
interface (for the description of all settings, see "8 Configuration" on
page 49):
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
▪ Select activation by digital inputs.
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each digital
input.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
INFORMATION
▪ Current (in A)
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
▪ Power input (in kW)
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
5.6.3
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters.
Therefore, the electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first.
The system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Limits certain electrical heaters.
If… has priority
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Domestic hot water production Booster heater.
Result: The backup heater will
be turned OFF first.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
23
6 Preparation
If… has priority
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Space heating
Backup heater.
Outdoor ambient temperature
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured.
Therefore, the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
▪ At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where
the most heat emitters are located
Result: The booster heater will
be turned OFF first.
2
3
4
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
Limits the outdoor unit.
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
outdoor sensor (option EKRSCA1).
▪ Setup:
Example
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
remote outdoor sensor and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both booster
heater and backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ Heater priority = Booster heater.
▪ During suspend (see "8 Configuration" on page 49), the outdoor
unit is turned down to reduce the standby energy losses. As a
result, the outdoor ambient temperature is NOT read out.
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
Ph
c
b
d
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [A.2.2.B].
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the
full time outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is
another reason to install the optional outdoor ambient temperature
sensor.
e
INFORMATION
a
A
B
Ph
Ce
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
5.7
C
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves and in the automatic heating/cooling changeover
logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the
outdoor unit is always used.
Ce
Produced heat
Consumed energy
Outdoor unit
Booster heater
Backup heater
Limited outdoor unit operation
Full outdoor unit operation
Booster heater turned ON
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
Backup heater step 2 turned ON
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the indoor or outdoor ambient temperature. Daikin recommends to
use an external temperature sensor in the following cases:
6
Preparation
6.1
Overview: Preparation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Preparing the installation site
▪ Preparing the water piping
Indoor ambient temperature
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface is used as room
thermostat and it measures the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore, the user interface must be installed on a location:
▪ Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ That is NOT near a heat source
▪ That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of,
for example, door opening/closing
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
indoor sensor (option KRCS01-1).
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
6.2
Preparing installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit must be covered.
Choose the installation location with sufficient place for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
▪ Setup:
▪ Requires control
EK2CB07CAV3.
box
EKCB07CAV3
and
option
box
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
remote indoor sensor and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
Mind the following spacing guidelines:
Configuration: Select room sensor [A.2.2.F.5].
Installer reference guide
24
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
6 Preparation
>250/400
>350
6.2.2
>250/400
b
a
a
>250
(mm)
>350
≤1200
b
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
(mm)
a
b
Air outlet
Air inlet
INFORMATION
If shut-off valves are installed on the unit, provide a
minimum space of 400 mm at the air inlet side. If shut‑off
valves are NOT installed on the unit, provide a minimum
space of 250 mm.
a
c
If the system contains a domestic hot water tank, meet the following
requirements:
b
Distance
domestic hot water tank
10 m
3‑way valve
10 m
d
Maximum allowable distance
between outdoor unit and …
c
See "14.2 Dimensions and service space" on page 88 for more
detailed information about spacing guidelines.
a
b
c
d
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
▪ In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm
above the maximum expected level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting
the outdoor unit" on page 33 for more details.
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation
site where the snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is
possible, make sure that the heat exchanger coil is NOT affected by
the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or shed and a pedestal.
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the
control box
INFORMATION
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
Snow cover or shed
Pedestal
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
20 m
Maximum distance between control box and backup
heater kit
10 m
Maximum distance between control box and
domestic hot water tank
10 m
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
50
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
Maximum distance between control box and
outdoor unit
50
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom and the like), so that
the operation noise will cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation
conditions, the measured value might be higher than the sound
pressure level mentioned in Sound spectrum in the data book due
to environmental noise and sound reflections.
▪ in coastal areas or other places where the air contains high levels
of salt. Corrosion may occur,
▪ where the voltage fluctuates a lot,
▪ where acidic or alkaline vapour is present.
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for
ambient temperatures ranging 10~43°C in cooling mode, –25~25°C
in space heating mode, and –25~35°C in domestic hot water
operation mode.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
50
50
600
100
▪ in vehicles or vessels,
(mm)
Installer reference guide
25
6 Preparation
>200
▪ The control box is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor locations
only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and vertical noncombustible wall.
▪ The control box is designed to operate in ambient temperatures
ranging from 5~35°C.
Do NOT install the control box in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom and the like), so that
the operation noise will cause no trouble.
>50
>50
>500
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
6.2.4
>350
▪ In places where frost is possible.
Installation site requirements of the
option box
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ The backup heater is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor
locations only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and
vertical non-combustible wall.
▪ The backup heater is designed
temperatures ranging from 5~30°C.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum distance between the option box and
control box EKCB07CAV3
3 m
operate
in
ambient
Do NOT install the backup heater in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom and the like), so that
the operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
50
50
to
▪ In places where frost is possible.
Preparing water piping
6.3.1
Water circuit requirements
600
INFORMATION
100
50
50
6.3
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
(mm)
▪ The option box is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor locations
only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and vertical noncombustible wall.
▪ The option box is designed to operate in ambient temperatures
ranging from 5~35°C.
Do NOT install the option box in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom and the like), so that
the operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible.
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
▪ Only use clean pipes
6.2.5
Installation site requirements of the
backup heater
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum distance between the backup heater and
the outdoor unit
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
10 m
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
NOTICE
If glycol is present in the system, make sure the thread
sealant used is resistant to glycol.
▪ Closed circuit. Use the outdoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
Installer reference guide
26
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
6 Preparation
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 88 for the external
static pressure curves of the outdoor unit.
▪ Water flow. It is required to guarantee a minimum flow of 12 l/min.
When the flow is lower, the system will stop operation and display
error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate
05+07 models
12 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water and glycol. Only use
materials that are compatible with the water (and, if applicable,
glycol) used in the system, and with the materials used in the
outdoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 3 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve, connections,…) MUST withstand the following
temperatures:
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
h
65°C
b
c
d
e
f
g
M
M
h
FCU3
h
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
89°C
i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FCU1...3
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater
Motorised 3‑way valve (supplied with the domestic hot
water tank)
Motorised 2‑way valve (field supply)
Collector
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Booster heater
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Provide a proper drain for the
pressure relief valve to avoid water coming into contact with
electrical parts.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
▪ Valve – Separating circuits. When using a 3-way valve in the
water circuit make sure that the domestic hot water circuit and the
floor heating circuit is fully separated.
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
▪ Filter. It is strongly recommended to install an additional filter on
the heating water circuit. Especially to remove metallic particles
from foul heating piping, it is recommended to use a magnetic or
cyclone filter, which can remove small particles. Small particles
may damage the unit and will NOT be removed by the standard
filter of the heat pump system.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.3.2 Domestic hot
water control: advanced" on page 64.
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
d
j
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
FCU1
FCU2
k
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
h
a
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. The outdoor unit has
a manual air purge valve. The backup heater (option) has an
automatic air purge valve. Check that automatic air purge valves
are NOT tightened too much, so that the automatic release of air
from the water circuit is possible.
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
a
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
6.3.2
Recirculation connection
Hot water connection
Shower
Recirculation pump
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
Installer reference guide
27
6 Preparation
6.3.3
To check the water volume and flow rate
The outdoor unit has an expansion vessel of 7 litre with a factory-set
pre-pressure of 1 bar
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel prepressure
Installation
height
difference(a)
≤7 m
Water volume
≤185/105 l(b)
>185/105 l(b)
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
Minimum water volume
>7 m
When circulation in each space heating loop is controlled
by remotely controlled valves, it is important that the
minimum water volume is guaranteed, even if all of the
valves are closed.
d
c
f
e
T1
(a)
(b)
g
T2
pre-
The expansion vessel of
the outdoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
▪ Check if the water recommended to install
volume does NOT an extra vessel outside
exceed the maximum the unit.
allowed water volume.
▪ Increase
pressure.
NOTICE
b
the
Do the following:
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
a
▪ Decrease
pressure.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
Check that the total water volume in the installation is minimum
20 litres, the internal water volume of the outdoor unit NOT included.
INFORMATION
Do the following:
T3
the
pre-
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the outdoor unit. If the outdoor unit
is at the highest point of the installation, the installation
height is 0 m.
The maximum water volume is 185 l in case the circuit is
only filled with water, and 105 l in case the circuit is filled
with water and glycol.
Minimum flow rate
M1
M2
Check that the minimum flow rate (required during defrost/backup
heater operation) in the installation is guaranteed in all conditions.
M3
NOTICE
d
If glycol was added to the water circuit, and the
temperature of the water circuit is low, the flow rate will
NOT be displayed on the user interface. In this case, the
minimum flow rate can be checked by way of the pump
test (check that the user interface does NOT display error
7H).
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
FHL1...3
T1...3
M1...3
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater kit (optional)
Collector (field supply)
By‑pass valve (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Individual room thermostat (optional)
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating/operation).
Maximum water volume
Minimum required flow rate
NOTICE
The maximum water volume depends on whether glycol is
added to the water circuit. For more information on the
addition of glycol, refer to "7.7.5 To protect the water circuit
against freezing" on page 38.
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
A
2,4
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 76.
6.3.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
1,8
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
0,6
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
20
70
A
B
105
120
150
170
Pre-pressure (bar)
Maximum water volume (l)
Water
Water + glycol
Installer reference guide
28
12 l/min
NOTICE
2,1
0,3
05+07 models
185
220
270
B
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the schräder
valve of the expansion vessel.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
6 Preparation
a
WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
a
6.3.5
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
Schräder valve
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
WARNING
The outdoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
▪ All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician and must comply with the applicable
legislation.
No actions or adjustments are required.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
Example 2
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction must comply with the applicable
legislation.
The outdoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 350 l. The concentration
of propylene glycol is 35%.
WARNING
Actions:
The backup heater should have a dedicated power supply.
▪ Because the total water volume (350 l) is more than the default
water volume (105 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
WARNING
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 150 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
6.4.2
▪ Because 350 l is more than 150 l, the expansion vessel is NOT
appropriate for the installation. Therefore the system requires an
external expansion vessel.
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
6.4
Preparing electrical wiring
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
6.4.1
About preparing electrical wiring
About preferential kWh rate power supply
INFORMATION
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
Control box EKCB07CAV3 is designed to receive an input signal by
which it switches the outdoor unit into forced-off mode. At that
moment, the compressor will not operate.
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
Overview of electrical connections except external actuators
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
29
6 Preparation
Normal power
supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
Power supply is
interrupted
b
a
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
f
3e
4
2
5
1
d
c
f
3
e
4
6
M
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
c
5
b
3
20
9 10 7 8
2
d
c
f
3
7
4
1
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
Remark: The
electricity company
must always allow the
power consumption
of the hydro part of
the outdoor unit (and
of the control box, if
part of the system).
6.4.3
11
0 5
1 0
6
e
2 c
13
1
d
17
a
b
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
hydro part of the
outdoor unit (and the
control box, if part of
the system) must be
powered by a
separate normal
power supply.
Normal power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Hydro part of the outdoor unit
Refrigerant part of the outdoor unit
Control box
Backup heater kit
Power supply for outdoor unit
Interconnection cable to control box
Interconnection cable to backup heater kit
Power supply for control box
Power supply for backup heater kit
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the hydro part of
the outdoor unit in the event of a power supply interruption
of the preferential kWh rate power supply)
19
16
e
18
15
M
a
b
c
d
e
f
27
29
28
26
23
22
6
25
24
Backup heater power supply
Backup heater kit
Outdoor unit
Control box
Option box
Domestic hot water tank
Outdoor unit
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Power supply
1
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2
Normal kWh rate power 2
supply
2+GND
(a)
6.3 A
User interface
3
2
(b)
Remote outdoor sensor 2
(c)
User interface
Optional equipment
4
Field-supplied components
5
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
(a)
(b)
The following illustration shows the required field wiring.
INFORMATION
d
21
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
14
5
5
1
2
12
Preferential kWh rate power supply
(c)
(c)
2
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Control box
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Power supply
6
Power supply for
control box
2+GND
(a)
Interconnection cable
Installer reference guide
30
7
Interconnection cable
between outdoor unit
and control box
2
(b)
8
Interconnection cable
for the user interface
(between outdoor unit
and control box)
2
(c)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
Item
9
10
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Interconnection cable 2
for the domestic hot
water pump (between
outdoor unit and control
box)
(d)
Interconnection cable 2
for the space heating/
cooling operation
control (or shut‑off
valve) (between
outdoor unit and control
box)
(d)
23
(e)
13
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(d)
14
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
2
(d)
15
3‑way valve
3
(f)
16
Power supply for
booster heater and
thermal protection
(from control box)
4+GND
(a)
Power supply for
booster heater (to
control box)
2+GND
18
Domestic hot water
tank thermistor
2
(f)
19
Room thermostat/heat
pump convector
3 or 4
100 mA(g)
20
Valve kit
3
(f)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Interconnection cable
between option box
and control box
3 (max 3 m)
(b)
24
Remote indoor sensor
2
(b)
25
Electric meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
26
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
(b)
27
Alarm output
2
(b)
28
Space cooling/heating
ON/OFF output
2
(b)
29
Changeover to external 2
heat source
(b)
13 A
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
NOTICE
▪ More technical specifications of the different
connections are indicated on the inside of the units
(outdoor unit, control box, option box and backup
heater).
▪ For how to connect the electrical wiring to the outdoor
unit (and if part of the system, the control box, option
box, and backup heater), refer to "7.8 Connecting the
electrical wiring" on page 39.
7
Installation
7.1
Overview: Installation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
Wires
Maximum
running
current
(a)
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm²; maximum length: 10 m.
Power supply
EKMBUHCA3V3 1× 230 V
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
▪ Mounting the outdoor unit
▪ Mounting the control box (if applicable)
▪ Mounting the backup heater (if applicable)
Interconnection cable 6 (*3V)
between backup heater
7 (*9W)
kit and control box
Backup heater
Maximum
running
current
(a)
Power supply for option 2+GND
box
(a)
(b)
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
20 m.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
The thermistor and connection wire (12 m) are delivered
with the domestic hot water tank.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm²; maximum length: 10 m.
Description
(a)
Wires
Field-supplied components
Interconnection cable
21
Description
Optional equipment
Backup heater kit
Item
4+GND
Interconnection cable
Preferential kWh rate
2
power supply (voltagefree contact)
(a)
(b)
3× 400 V
22
Optional equipment
17
2+GND+2 bridges
Power supply
(c)
12
Required number of
conductors
EKMBUHCA9W1 1× 230 V
Item
2
User interface
Power supply
Option box
User interface
11
Backup heater
Required number of
conductors
▪ Connecting the water piping
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring
▪ Finishing the installation of the outdoor unit
▪ Finishing the installation of the control box (if applicable)
▪ Finishing the installation of the backup heater (if applicable)
2+GND
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
31
7 Installation
7.2
Opening the units
7.2.1
About opening the units
7.2.4
To open the control box
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
2
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit
1
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
2×
1
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
WARNING
1
The screws are delivered with toothed lock washers.
ALWAYS use toothed lock washers, also when the screws
need to be replaced. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electric shock.
INFORMATION
The holes in the front plate are for the connection of the
user interface to the control box. If you do NOT connect
the user interface to the control box, do NOT remove the
plugs from the holes.
2
8×
7.2.5
7.2.3
To open the option box
To open the switch box cover of the
outdoor unit
2
3×
1
2×
1
WARNING
The screws are delivered with toothed lock washers.
ALWAYS use toothed lock washers, also when the screws
need to be replaced. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electric shock.
INFORMATION
Do NOT remove the plugs from the front plate of the option
box.
Installer reference guide
32
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
7.2.6
To open the backup heater
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
2
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
INFORMATION
For information on the available options, contact your
dealer.
If the unit is installed directly on the floor, prepare 4 sets of M8 or
M10 anchor bolts, nuts and washers (field supply) as follows:
1
INFORMATION
2×
7.2.7
The maximum height of the upper protruding part of the
bolts is 15 mm.
To open the switch box cover of the
backup heater
NOTICE
Fix the outdoor unit to the foundation bolts using nuts with
resin washers (a). If the coating on the fastening area is
stripped off, the nuts rust easily.
a
2
0
3×
Mounting the outdoor unit
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit
28
3
When
You have to mount the outdoor unit before you can connect the
water piping.
Typical workflow
(mm)
>300
<
10
0
7.3
74
0
<
10
1
In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above
the maximum expected level of snow.
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
2
3
4
5
Providing the installation structure.
Installing the outdoor unit.
Providing drainage.
Preventing the outdoor unit from falling over.
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 24.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
33
74
0
15
0
<
3
a
28
>300
100
<
15
0
7 Installation
(mm)
a
Maximum snowfall height
It is possible to install the unit on brackets to the wall:
7.3.4
>2
50
/40
0
To install the outdoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT remove the protective cardboard before the unit is
installed properly.
Lift the outdoor unit.
2
Install the outdoor unit as follows:
>300
1
a
(mm)
a
Maximum snowfall height
Installer reference guide
34
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent the
invasion of water in the unit and to avoid the drain water dripping
(see the following illustration).
a
a
2
2×
1
NOTICE
If the unit is installed in a cold climate, take adequate
measures so that the evacuated condensate cannot
freeze.
a
Air outlet
INFORMATION
NOTICE
For information on the available options, contact your
dealer.
Properly align the unit. Make sure the backside of the unit
does NOT protrude.
3
NOTICE
Remove the protective cardboard and instruction sheet.
Provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least
100 mm above the expected level of snow.
b
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
a
a
b
Protective cardboard
Instruction sheet
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the supporting feet, do NOT tilt the
unit sideways in any way:
7.3.5
To provide drainage
▪ Avoid installation places where water leaking from the unit due to
a blocked drain pan, cause damage to the location.
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is a proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
▪ When the unit is in cooling mode, condensate may also form in
the hydro part. When providing drainage, therefore make sure to
cover the entire unit.
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water surrounding the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does not
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
35
7 Installation
NOTICE
Mounting the control box
7.4.1
About mounting the control box
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the control
box
Make sure that the marks (2 by 2) are completely level and
that their dimensions correspond to the figure below.
310 mm
7.4
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.4.3
318 mm
To install the control box
3
Drill 4 holes and install 4 plugs (suitable for M5).
1
Remove the front plate.
4
2
Hold the back plate against the wall and mark the fixation points
(2 on the top and 2 at the bottom).
Put the screws in the top plugs and hang the box on the
screws.
5
Put the screws in the bottom plugs.
6
Fix the 4 screws firmly.
NOTICE
Make sure that the marks (2 by 2) are completely level and
that their dimensions correspond to the figure below.
7.6
Mounting the backup heater
7.6.1
About mounting the backup heater
310 mm
NOTICE
▪ The backup heater can only be installed and used in
combination with the outdoor unit and control box
EKCB07CAV3.
▪ The backup heater can only be connected to the space
heating water outlet of the outdoor unit. Other
connections are NOT allowed.
318 mm
3
Drill 4 holes and install 4 plugs (suitable for M5).
4
Put the screws in the top plugs and hang the box on the
screws.
5
Put the screws in the bottom plugs.
6
Fix the 4 screws firmly.
▪ Only one backup heater can be connected to the
outdoor unit. It is NOT allowed to combine multiple
heater kits in series or parallel.
7.6.2
Precautions when mounting the backup
heater
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
It is possible to connect the user interface to the control
box. For more information, refer to "7.8.7 To connect the
user interface" on page 42.
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.5
Mounting the option box
7.5.1
About mounting the option box
7.5.2
Precautions when mounting the option
box
7.6.3
1
To install the backup heater
Fix the wall bracket to the wall with M5 screws.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.5.3
To install the option box
1
Remove the front plate.
2
Hold the back plate against the wall and mark the fixation points
(2 on the top and 2 at the bottom).
Installer reference guide
36
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
7.7
Connecting the water piping
7.7.1
About connecting the water piping
Before connecting the water piping
Make sure the outdoor unit is mounted. If applicable, also make sure
the control box and the backup heater are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
2×
1
2
Connecting the water piping of the outdoor unit.
Connecting the water piping of the backup heater and/or the
domestic hot water tank (if applicable).
3
4
5
6
Filling the water circuit.
Protecting the water circuit against freezing (addition of glycol).
Filling the domestic hot water tank (if applicable).
Insulating the water piping.
7.7.2
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
INFORMATION
2
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
Hang the backup heater onto the wall bracket.
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.7.3
To connect the water piping
NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit. Make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 30 N•m.
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves are provided.
Mount the valves on the water inlet and on the water outlet. Mind
their position: the integrated drain valves will only drain the side of
the circuit on which they are located. To be able to only drain the
unit, make sure the drain valves are positioned between the shut‑off
valves and the unit.
3
Mark the position of the hole at the bottom of the backup
heater.
4
Remove the backup heater from the wall bracket.
5
Drill a hole for the bottom screw and insert a plug.
6
Hang the backup heater onto the wall bracket. Make sure it is
fixed properly.
7
Fix the bottom of the backup heater to the wall with an M5
screw.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
a
b
a
b
Water inlet
Water outlet
1
Screw the outdoor unit nuts on the shut-off valves.
2
Connect the field piping on the shut-off valves.
3
In case of connection with the optional domestic hot water tank,
see the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
Installer reference guide
37
7 Installation
7.7.5
NOTICE
▪ Install a manometer in the system.
▪ Install air purge valves at all local high points.
NOTICE
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device should be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
Frost can damage the system. To prevent the hydraulic components
from freezing, the software is equipped with special frost protection
functions, that include the activation of pump, internal heaters, and/
or backup heater operation in case of low temperatures.
However, in case of a power failure, these functions cannot
guarantee protection. It is therefore recommended to add glycol to
the water circuit. The required concentration depends on the lowest
expected outdoor temperature, and on whether you want to protect
the system from bursting or from freezing. To prevent the system
from freezing, more glycol is required. Add glycol according to the
table below.
INFORMATION
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
To protect the water circuit against
freezing
▪ Protection against bursting: the glycol will prevent the
piping from bursting, but NOT the liquid inside the
piping from freezing.
▪ Protection against freezing: the glycol will prevent the
liquid inside the piping from freezing.
Lowest expected
outdoor
temperature
Prevent from
bursting
Prevent from
freezing
–5°C
10%
15%
–10°C
15%
25%
–15°C
20%
35%
–20°C
25%
—
–25°C
30%
—
NOTICE
7.7.4
To connect the water piping to the backup
heater
NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit. Make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 30 N•m.
1
Connect the water piping (field supply) to the water in- and
outlet of the backup heater.
▪ The required concentration might differ depending on
the type of glycol. ALWAYS compare the requirements
from the table above with the specifications provided by
the glycol manufacturer. If necessary, meet the
requirements set by the glycol manufacturer.
▪ The added concentration of glycol should NEVER
exceed 35%.
▪ If the liquid in the system is frozen, the pump will NOT
be able to start. Mind that if you only prevent the
system from bursting, the liquid inside might still freeze.
▪ In case of a power supply failure or pump failure, and
NO glycol was added to the system, drain the system.
▪ When water is at standstill inside the system, the
system is very likely to freeze and get damaged.
b
a
a
b
Water inlet
Water outlet
NOTICE
When installing the backup heater in a reversible system
(EBLQ05+07CAV3), condensation may occur. Therefore
provide a bypass by installing valve kit EKMBHBP1 to the
water inlet of the backup heater. This valve kit is not yet
available for sale, but will become available later in 2015.
Do NOT install any other valve kit than EKMBHBP1.
The types of glycol that can be used depend on whether the system
contains a domestic hot water tank:
If…
Then…
The system contains a domestic Only use propylene glycol(a)
hot water tank
The system does NOT contain a You can use either propylene
domestic hot water tank
glycol(a) or ethylene glycol
(a)
Propylene glycol, including the necessary inhibitors,
classified as Category III according to EN1717.
WARNING
Ethylene glycol is toxic.
INFORMATION
Inside the backup heater, an automatic air purge valve is
installed. For the location of this valve, refer to the
"Technical data" chapter of the installer reference guide.
For instructions on how to perform an air purge, refer to
"9 Commissioning" on page 76.
Installer reference guide
38
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
NOTICE
5
Purge as much air as possible from the water circuit.
Glycol absorbs water from its environment. Therefore do
NOT add glycol that has been exposed to air. Leaving the
cap off the glycol container causes the concentration of
water to increase. The glycol concentration is then lower
than assumed. As a result, the hydraulic components
might freeze up after all. Take preventive actions to ensure
a minimal exposure of the glycol to air.
INFORMATION
▪ To purge air, use all air purge valves present in the
system. This includes the manual air purge valve of the
outdoor unit, as well as any field-supplied valves.
▪ For the location of the manual air purge valve, see
"Components: Outdoor unit" in chapter "14 Technical
data" on page 88.
NOTICE
▪ If the system contains a backup heater, also use the air
purge valve of the backup heater. For the location of
this valve, see "Components: Backup heater" in
chapter "14 Technical data" on page 88.
▪ If overpressure occurs, the system will release some of
the liquid through the pressure relief valve. If glycol was
added to the system, take adequate measures so as to
safely recover it.
▪ For instructions on how to perform an air purge, see
"9 Commissioning" on page 76.
▪ In any case, make sure that the flexible hose of the
pressure relief valve is ALWAYS free to release
pressure. Prevent water from staying and/or freezing
up inside the hose.
NOTICE
When purging air with the manual air purge valve of the
unit, collect any fluid that might leak out of the valve. If this
fluid is NOT collected, it might drip on internal components
and damage the unit.
WARNING
Due to presence of glycol, corrosion of the system is
possible. Uninhibited glycol will turn acidic under the
influence of oxygen. This process is accelerated by the
presence of copper and high temperatures. The acidic
uninhibited glycol attacks metal surfaces and forms
galvanic corrosion cells that cause severe damage to the
system. Therefore it is important that:
▪ the water treatment is correctly executed by a qualified
water specialist,
6
Refill the circuit until the pressure is ±2.0 bar.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until no more air is purged and there are
no more pressure drops.
8
Close the drain and fill valve.
9
Disconnect the water supply hose from the drain and fill valve.
NOTICE
▪ a glycol with corrosion inhibitors is selected to
counteract acids formed by the oxidation of glycols,
The water pressure indicated on the manometer will vary
depending on the water temperature (higher pressure at
higher water temperature).
▪ no automotive glycol is used because their corrosion
inhibitors have a limited lifetime and contain silicates
which can foul or plug the system,
▪ galvanized pipes are NOT used in glycol systems since
the presence may lead to the precipitation of certain
components in the glycol's corrosion inhibitor.
Adding glycol to the water circuit reduces the maximum allowed
water volume of the system. For more information, refer to the
chapter "To check the water volume and flow rate" in the installer
reference guide.
7.7.6
1
To fill the water circuit
Connect the water supply hose to the drain and fill valve.
However, at all times water pressure shall remain above
1 bar to avoid air entering the circuit.
7.7.7
To fill the domestic hot water tank
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
7.7.8
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the
heating and cooling capacity.
To prevent the freezing of the outdoor water piping during winter
time, the thickness of the sealing material MUST be at least 13 mm
(with λ=0.039 W/mK).
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
During winter, protect the water piping and shut‑off valves against
freezing by adding heat tape (field supply). If the outdoor
temperature can drop below –20°C and no heat tape is used, it is
recommended to install the shut‑off valves indoors.
2
Open the drain and fill valve.
3
If an automatic air purge valve was installed, make sure it is
open.
4
Fill the circuit with water until the manometer (field supply)
indicates a pressure of ±2.0 bar.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7.8
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.8.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure the water piping is connected.
Installer reference guide
39
7 Installation
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the units.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit (if
applicable).
3
Connecting the electrical wiring to control box EKCB07CAV3 (if
applicable).
4
Connecting the electrical wiring to option box EK2CB07CAV3 (if
applicable).
5
Connecting the electrical wiring to the backup heater (if
applicable).
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Connecting the main power supply
Connecting the backup heater power supply (if applicable).
Connecting the user interface.
Connecting the shut–off valves (if applicable).
Connecting the electrical meters (if applicable).
Connecting the domestic hot water pump (if applicable).
Connecting the alarm output (if applicable).
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output (if
applicable).
14
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source (if
applicable).
15
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs (if applicable).
b
a
a
b
Stranded conductor wire
Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Wire type
Installation method
cb
Single core wire
A
AA´
A´
c
a
a
a Curled single core wire
b Screw
c Flat washer
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
cb
a
B
bc
B
a
a Terminal
b Screw
7.8.2
About electrical compliance
c Flat washer
Only for EBLQ07CAV3+EDLQ07CAV3
NOTICE
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic
currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage
systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.).
Precautions when laying power wiring:
7.8.3
▪ Do not connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure below.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
INFORMATION
More information about the legend and the location of the
wiring diagram of the unit can be found in "14.6 Wiring
diagram" on page 99.
WARNING
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
Tightening torques
Item
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
M4 (X1M)
7.8.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
1.2~1.5
M4 (earth)
Item
Keep the following in mind:
M4 (X4M/X1M)
▪ If stranded conductor wires are being used, install a round crimpstyle terminal on the tip. Place the round crimp-style terminal on
the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal with the
appropriate tool.
M4 (earth)
7.8.5
1
Installer reference guide
40
Tightening torque (N•m)
Tightening torque (N•m)
1.2~1.5
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
Remove the switch box cover. See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor
unit" on page 32.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
2
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
b
a
b
3
Strip wire end to this point
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
Insert the wiring from the back of the unit:
a
b
c
≥25 mm
a
b
c
Low voltage
High voltage
Main power supply
NOTICE
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
Routing
Possible cables (depends on the installed options)
a
▪ User interface
Low voltage
▪ Interconnection cable to control box EKCB07CAV3
▪ Remote outdoor sensor (option)
b
▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
High voltage
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
▪ Space heat/cool operation control
c
▪ Main power supply
Main power supply
4
Inside the unit, route the wiring as follows:
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
7.8.6
1
To connect the main power supply
Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
X6Y
X6YA
A2P
X1A
a
X19A
b
a
b
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring + main power supply
5
Make sure that the cable does NOT come in contact with sharp
edges.
6
Install the switch box cover.
X5M
1
2
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
X4M
X3M
a
INFORMATION
When installing field supply or option cables, foresee
sufficient cable length. This will make it possible to remove/
reposition the switch box and gain acces to other
components during service.
3
123
1
2
3
a
GND
L
N
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Installer reference guide
41
7 Installation
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
#
1
Action
Connect the user interface cable to the outdoor unit.
X2M
X6Y X6YB
A2P
X6YA
X19A
X1A
1
2
3
5
6
X5M
1 2
10
9
X5M
X4M
X8M
A5P
A5P
X3M
12
1
2
3
a
b
c
c
a
b
123
a
S1S
GND
L
N
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Preferential power supply contact (on the control box)
b
a Main user interface(a)
b Optional user interface
2
INFORMATION
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the
wallplate.
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
For the exact position of connectors X6Y, X6YA, and X6YB
in the switch box, refer to "14.4.2 Components: Switch box
(outdoor unit)" on page 94.
INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, the
necessity of a separate normal kWh rate power supply to
the hydro part of the outdoor unit (b) X3M/5+6 depends on
the type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
A separate connection to the hydro part of the outdoor unit
is required:
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption by the hydro part of the
outdoor unit is allowed at the preferential kWh rate
power supply when active.
7.8.7
To connect the user interface
Connection to outdoor unit
3
Fix the wallplate of the user interface to the wall.
4
Connect as shown in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
5
Reinstall the faceplate onto the wallplate.
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when attaching the
frontplate to the unit.
(a)
The main user interface is required for operation, but has to
be ordered separately (mandatory option).
Connection to control box
▪ If you use 1 user interface, you can connect it onto control box
EKCB07CAV3 (for control close to the control box), or in the room
(where used as room thermostat).
▪ If you use 2 user interfaces, you can connect 1 user interface onto
control box EKCB07CAV3 (for control close to the control box) + 1
user interface in the room (where used as room thermostat).
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit
according to the instructions below.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system,
connect the user interface to the control box. For
instructions, see "Connection to control box" below.
Installer reference guide
42
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
#
1
Onto control box
In the room
Connect the user interface cable to
control box terminals X2M/20+21.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the
cable tie mountings.
X2M
21
20
#
Connect the user
interface cable to
control box
terminals
X2M/20+21.
Onto control box
Route the cable
from the right-hand
side of the
terminals, fasten it
to the cable tie
mountings and route
it through the hole of
the low voltage
wiring.
A1P
A5P
X1M
In the room
Fix the wall plate of the user interface Fix the wall plate of
the user interface to
to the front panel of the control box
using the M4 bolts and nuts from the the wall.
accessory bag.
When NOT
Be careful NOT to distort the shape connecting a user
of the backside of the user interface interface to the
control box, do NOT
by overtightening the mounting
remove the plugs
screws.
from the holes in the
front plate.
3
4
2
2×
X8M
1
a
a Main user interface(a)
2
2×
4
5
Connect as shown in 4A.
Connect as shown
in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
6
Reconnect the faceplate to the wall plate.
Connect the control box to the outdoor unit.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when connecting the
front panel to the control box.
X2M
(a)
21
20
The main user interface is required for operation, but has to
be ordered separately (mandatory option).
4B From the left
4A From the rear
PCB
PCB
1×
1 2
X5M
a
b
1×
a
b
4C From the top
4D From the top centre
a
a
b
b
PCB
PCB
3
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the wall
plate.
1×
1×
b
b
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
a
b
7.8.8
1
Notch this part for the wiring to pass through with nippers
etc.
Secure the wiring to the front part of the casing using the
wiring retainer and clamp.
To connect the shut-off valve
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
Only connect NO (normal open) valves.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
43
7 Installation
NO
7.8.10
X4M
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the control box.
2
Make sure the low voltage wiring is located on the right. Route it
through the intake hole and fasten it with cable ties.
1
2
X5M
To connect the electrical wiring on the
control box
X3M
M2S
INFORMATION
By default, the shut‑off valve is to be connected to the
outdoor unit. However, if control box EKCB07CAV3 is
present in the system, you can also connect it to the
control box. To do this, connect outdoor unit terminals
X3M/1+2 to control box terminals X8M/6+7, and then
connect the shut‑off valve to control box terminals
X8M/6+7.
c
a
b
c
b
a
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring
Main power supply
NOTICE
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
X2M
7.8.11
67
X3M
X8M
1
To connect the control box power supply
Connect the power supply cable to the control box.
X1M
1 2
X5M
M2S
▪
7.8.9
X8M
123
123
To connect the domestic hot water pump
1
Connect outdoor unit terminals X3M/3+4 to the bottom side of
terminals X8M/8+9 of control box EKCB07CAV3.
2
Connect the cable of the domestic hot water pump to the
bottom side of control box terminals X8M/8+9.
1
2
3
2
GND
L
N
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with sharp edges.
CAUTION
X2M
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
7.8.12
89
M2P
To connect the interconnection cable
between control box and outdoor unit
1
Connect X2M/22 (control box) to X5M/4 (outdoor unit).
2
Connect X2M/23 (control box) to X5M/3 (outdoor unit).
M
1~
Installer reference guide
44
X5M
3 4
X8M
X3M
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
X2M
X2M
A4P
X2M
A4P
23
22
X1M
1 2 3
X1M
1 2 3
X8M
3 4
X5M
1
2
3
2
X8M
GND
L
N
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with sharp edges.
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
3
Tie the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.13
To connect the electrical wiring on the
option box
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the option box.
2
Make sure the low voltage wiring is located on the right. Route it
through the intake hole and fasten it with cable ties:
7.8.15
To connect the interconnection cable
between option box and control box
1
Connect the connectors from the accessory bag to X5A on A1P
of both the control box and the option box PCB.
2
Connect the connectors by way of a field-supplied cable.
a
b
a
X5A
X5A
A4P
A4P
c
a
b
c
b
a
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring
Main power supply
NOTICE
a
b
7.8.16
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
Connectors (accessory)
Interconnection cable (field supply)
To connect the electrical meters
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
7.8.14
1
To connect the option box power supply
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
Connect option box terminal X1M to control box terminal X1M.
INFORMATION
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X2M/7 and X2M/9; the negative polarity to X2M/8 and
X2M/10.
1
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
45
7 Installation
X2M
X2M
A4P
A4P
15
13
10
9
8
7
X1M
X1M
X8M
X8M
S5P S6P
2
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.17
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
7.8.19
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/
OFF output
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
1
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
1
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
X2M
12
X8M
A4P
12
11
6
5
4
3
2
1
X1M
2
X8M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.20
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
S3P S2P S1P S4P
S3P
S2P
S1P
S4P
2
1
Connect to terminals X2M/1+2
Connect to terminals X2M/3+4
Connect to terminals X2M/5+6
Connect to terminals X2M/11+12
X1M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.18
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
34
X8M
To connect the alarm output
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
1
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
LN
2
Installer reference guide
46
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
7 Installation
7.8.21
To connect the electrical wiring on the
backup heater
Backup
heater type
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax(Ω)
Routing
Possible cables (depends on the installed options)
*3V
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
a
▪ Backup heater kit thermistor (interconnection with
control box EKCB07CAV3)
*9W
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
6 kW
1~ 230 V
26 A(a)(b)
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
8.6 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
Low voltage
▪ Backup heater kit thermal protector (interconnection
with control box EKCB07CAV3)
▪ Backup heater kit connection (to control box
EKCB07CAV3)
b
(a)
▪ Main power supply
High
voltage
(b)
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the backup heater.
2
Inside the backup heater, route the wiring as follows:
Backup heater
type
Routing
*3V
a
b
a Low voltage wiring
b High voltage wiring
*9W
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
1
Connect the backup heater power supply. For *3V models, a
double‑pole fuse is used for F1B. For *9W models, a 4‑pole
fuse is used for F1B.
2
If required, modify the connection on terminal X14M.
Backup heater
type
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*3V)
Connections to
terminals
—
F1B
L N
a
b
a Low voltage wiring
b High voltage wiring
3
Fix the wiring with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
NOTICE
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
6 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
F1B
L
X14M
1 2 3 4 5 6
N
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
7.8.22
To connect the backup heater power
supply
CAUTION
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
6 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
F1B
X14M
1 2 3 4 5 6
L1 L2 L3
CAUTION
If a tank with a built‑in electrical booster heater (EKHW) is
part of the system, use a dedicated power circuit for the
backup heater and booster heater. NEVER use a power
circuit shared by another appliance. This power circuit
must be protected with the required safety devices
according to the applicable legislation.
Special remark for fuses:
Depending on the model, the backup heater capacity can vary. Make
sure that the power supply is in accordance with the backup heater
capacity, as listed in the table below.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
47
7 Installation
Ω
Ω
K1M
K2M
1 3 5 13
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
2 4 6 14
K5M
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
Special remark for terminals:
7.8.23
As mentioned on the table above, the connections on the terminals
X6M and X7M need to be changed to configure a backup heater.
Refer to the illustration below as a caution about handling the
terminals.
To connect the backup heater kit to the
control box
INFORMATION
▪ Requires control box EKCB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to control box EKCB07CAV3.
1
For the thermistor, connect 2 wires between backup heater
terminals X15M/1+2 and control box terminals X2M/5+6.
2
For the thermal protector, connect 2 wires between backup
heater terminals X15M/3+4 and control box terminals
X2M/11+12.
3
For the connection with the control box, connect 3 wires
between backup heater terminals X15M/5+6+7 and control box
terminals X2M/13+14+15.
X2M
A4P
3
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
F1B
For more information on the backup heater types, and for
how to configure the backup heater, refer to the
"Configuration" chapter of the installation manual of the
outdoor unit.
K1M/1
6
5
X1M
1234567
X15M
During connection of the backup heater, miswiring is possible. To
detect possible miswiring on the *9W model, it is highly
recommended to measure the resistance value of the heater
elements. Depending on the different backup heater types, following
resistance values (see table below) should be measured. ALWAYS
measure the resistance on the contactor clamps K1M, K2M, and
K5M.
15
14
13
12
11
X8M
3 kW
6 kW
6 kW
9 kW
1~ 230 V
1~ 230 V
3N~
400 V
3N~
400 V
K5M/13
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
∞
∞
K1M/3
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
▪ For details about the connections, refer to the wiring
diagram.
4
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
K1M/5
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
▪ Use a multi-core cable.
K1M/3
K1M/5
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K2M/1
K5M/13
∞
26.5Ω
∞
∞
K2M/3
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
▪ For backup heater kit EKMBUHCA3V3, it is NOT
required to make a connection between backup heater
terminal X15M/6 and control box terminal X2M/14.
K2M/5
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/3
K2M/5
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K1M/5
K2M/1
∞
∞
∞
∞
Example measure resistance between K1M/1 and K5M/13:
7.9
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
7.9.1
To close the outdoor unit
1
Installer reference guide
48
Close the switch box cover.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
2
Mount the top plate and the front plate.
NOTICE
When closing the outdoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
7.10
Finishing the control box
installation
Method
Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure.
#
7.10.1
To close the control box
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview settings.
1
Code
See also:
Close the front plate.
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 50
7.11
Finishing the option box
installation
▪ "8.5 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 75
8.1.1
7.11.1
1
To close the option box
Close the front plate.
7.12
Prerequisite: The EKPCCAB kit is required.
1
Connect the cable with USB connection to your PC.
2
Connect the plug of the cable to X10A on A1P of the switch box
of the outdoor unit, or to X12A on A4P of the switch box of
control box EKCB07CAV3.
Finishing the backup heater
installation
7.12.1
A
Close the switch box cover.
2
Close the front plate.
B
A1P
To close the backup heater
1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box
A4P
X10A
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
X12A
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
Why
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
A
B
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
3
How
Outdoor unit switch box
Control box switch box
Pay special attention to the position of the plug!
You can configure the system using two different methods.
Method
Description
First time – Quick wizard. When you turn
ON the user interface for the first time (via
the indoor unit), a quick wizard starts to help
you configure the system.
H JST
Configuring via the
user interface
2
3
4
5
Afterwards. If necessary, you can make
changes to the configuration afterwards.
Configuring via the
PC configurator
You can prepare the configuration off-site on
PC and afterwards upload the configuration
to the system with the PC configurator.
See also: "8.1.1 To connect the PC cable to
the switch box" on page 49.
INFORMATION
When the installer settings are changed, the user interface
will request to confirm. When confirmed, the screen will
shortly turn OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several
seconds.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
NOTICE
Another cable is already connected to X10A. To connect
the PC cable to X10A, therefore temporarily disconnect
this other cable. Do NOT forget to reconnect it afterwards.
Installer reference guide
49
8 Configuration
8.1.2
To access the most used commands
01
00 00 01 20 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
To access the installer settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A]:
Overview settings
> Installer settings.
To access the overview settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A.8]:
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
To set the user permission level to Installer
1
Set the user permission level to Adv. end user.
2
Go to [6.4]:
3
Press
Repeat previous steps if you have to modify other settings.
6
Push
7
At installer settings menu, press
1
Go to the main menu or any of its submenus:
2
Press
OK
.
To set the user permission level to End user
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to End user. The user
interface will return to the default home screen.
Cancel
Confirm
Adjust
Result: The system will restart.
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first
to the second user interface
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to Adv. end user.
Additional information is displayed and "+" is added to the menu title.
The user permission level will stay in Adv. end user until set
otherwise.
If a second user interface is connected, the installer must first
proceed below instructions for the proper configuration of the 2 user
interfaces.
This procedure offers you also the possibility to copy the language
set from one user interface to the other one: e.g. from EKRUCBL2 to
EKRUCBL1.
1
When power is turned on for the first time, both user interfaces
display:
To modify an overview setting
Tue 15:10
U5:Auto address
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
1
Go to [A.8]:
2
Go to the corresponding screen of the first part of the setting by
using the
and
button.
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
Push 4 sec. to continue
INFORMATION
An additional 0-digit is added to the first part of the setting
when you access the codes in the overview settings.
2
Example: [1‑01]: "1" will result in "01".
During the quick wizard, the second user interface displays
Busy and will NOT be possible to operate.
01
00 00 01 15 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
3
Adjust
3
The quick wizard will guide you.
4
For proper operation of the system, the local data on the two
user interfaces must be the same. If this is NOT the case, both
user interfaces will display:
Scroll
Go to the corresponding second part of the setting by using the
and
button.
Overview settings
Synchronization
Data difference detected.
Please select action:
01
00 00 01 15 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
Confirm
Adjust
Send data
Confirm
5
Scroll
Result: The value to be modified is now highlighted.
4
Modify the value by using the
Installer reference guide
50
Push
for 4 seconds on the user interface on which you want
to proceed to the quick wizard. This user interface is now the
main user interface.
INFORMATION
Overview settings
Confirm
to confirm the settings.
Installer settings
The system will restart.
If you do NOT press any button for more than 1 hour or press
again for more than 4 seconds, the installer permission level
switches back to End user.
Press
to confirm the modification of the parameter.
is displayed on the home pages.
To set the user permission level to Advanced end user
1
5
for more than 4 seconds.
Result:
4
> Information > User permission level.
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
and
button.
Adjust
Select the required action:
▪ Send data: the user interface you are operating contains the
correct data and the data on the other user interface will be
overwritten.
▪ Receive data: the user interface you are operating does
NOT contain the correct data and the data on the other user
interface will be used to overwrite.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
6
The user interface requests confirmation if you are sure to
proceed.
Time
What is the current time?
Start copy
Are you sure you want to
start the copy operation?
OK
Confirm
7
00 : 00
Confirm
Cancel
3
Adjust
Confirm the selection on the screen by pushing
and all data
(languages, schedules etc.) will be synchronised from the
selected source user interface to the other one.
INFORMATION
▪ It is recommended to change installer settings, or the
configuration of the unit, on the main user interface. If
not, it can take up to 5 minutes before these changes
are visible in the menu structure.
8
Your system is now set to be operated by the 2 user interfaces.
Set the system layout settings: Standard, Options, Capacities.
For more details, see "8.2 Basic configuration" on page 51.
A.2
System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
▪ During the copying, both controllers will NOT allow
operation.
▪ The copy operation can take up until 90 minutes.
Select
4
After configuration, select Confirm layout and press
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after
first power ON
After first power ON of the system, you are guided on the user
interface to do initial settings:
.
Confirm layout
Please confirm the system
layout. The system will
restart and will be ready for
first startup.
To copy the language set from the first to
the second user interface
See "8.1.3 To copy the system settings from the first to the second
user interface" on page 50.
1
Scroll
Cancel
OK
8.1.4
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
5
Adjust
The user interface re-initialises and you can proceed the
installation by setting the other applicable settings and
commissioning of the system.
When the installer settings are changed, the system will request to
confirm. When confirmation is complete, the screen will shortly turn
OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several seconds.
8.2
Basic configuration
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date
▪ language,
▪ date,
▪ time,
#
Code
Description
▪ system layout.
[A.1]
N/A
Language
By confirming the system layout, you can proceed with the
installation and commissioning of the system.
[1]
N/A
Time and date
1
At power ON, the quick wizard starts as long as the system
layout was NOT confirmed yet, by setting the language.
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard
Space heating/cooling settings
Language
Select the desired language
The system can heat up or cool down a space. Depending on the
type of application, the space heating/cooling settings must be made
accordingly.
#
Confirm
2
[A.2.1.7]
Adjust
Set the current date and time.
Date
What is the date today?
Tue 1 Jan 2013
Confirm
Adjust
Scroll
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Code
[C-07]
Description
Unit control method:
▪ 0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving water
temperature regardless the actual
room temperature and/or heating or
cooling demand of the room.
▪ 1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation is
decided by the external thermostat or
equivalent (e.g. heat pump convector).
▪ 2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Installer reference guide
51
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.8]
Code
[7-02]
#
Description
The system can supply leaving water to
up to 2 water temperature zones. During
configuration, the number of water zones
must be set.
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
Number of LWT zones:
▪ 0 (1 LWT zone)(default): Only 1
leaving water temperature zone. This
zone is called the main leaving water
temperature zone.
Description
When the space heating/cooling control
is OFF by the user interface, the pump is
always OFF. When the space heating/
cooling control is On, you can select the
desired pump operation mode (only
applicable during space heating/cooling)
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 (Continuous): Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b
c
b
a
c
d
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ a: Main LWT zone
▪ b: OFF
continued >>
▪ c: On
#
[A.2.1.8]
Code
[7-02]
Description
▪ d: Pump operation
<< continuation
▪ 1 (2 LWT zones): 2 leaving water
temperature zones. The zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature (in
heating) is called the main leaving
water temperature zone. The zone
with the highest leaving water
temperature (in heating) is called the
additional leaving water temperature
zone. In practice, the main leaving
water temperature zone consists of
the higher load heat emitters and a
mixing station is installed to achieve
the desired leaving water temperature.
a
b
continued >>
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
Description
<< continuation
▪ 1 (Sample): The pump is ON. When
there is heating or cooling demand as
the leaving temperature has not
reached the desired temperature yet.
When thermo OFF condition occurs,
the pump runs every 5 minutes to
check the water temperature and
demand heating or cooling if
necessary. Remark: Sample is NOT
available in extended room thermostat
control or room thermostat control.
a
c
b
e
d
g
b
f
c
▪ a: Add LWT zone
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: Main LWT zone
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: LWT temperature
▪ e: Actual
▪ f: Desired
▪ g: Pump operation
continued >>
Installer reference guide
52
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
#
Description
Code
[A.2.2.A]
<< continuation
[D-02]
▪ 2 (Request)(default): Pump operation
based on request. Example: Using a
room thermostat creates thermo ON/
OFF condition. When there is no such
demand, the pump is OFF. Remark:
Request is NOT available in leaving
water temperature control.
a
b
c
d
e
b
c
DHW pump:
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Secondary rtrn): Installed for instant
hot water when water is tapped. The
end-user sets the operation timing
(weekly schedule time) of the
domestic hot water pump when it
should run. Control of this pump is
possible through the outdoor unit.
b
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ 2 (Disinf. shunt): Installed for
disinfection. It runs when the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by ext RT or
RT)
See also illustrations below.
▪ e: Pump operation
#
[A.2.1.B]
Code
N/A
Description
The outdoor unit offers the possibility to
connect a field supplied domestic hot
water pump (On/OFF type). Depending
on the installation and configuration on
the user interface, we distinguish its
functionality.
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
Instant hot water
Description
Only if there are 2 user interfaces (1
installed in the room, 1 installed at the
indoor unit):
Disinfection
h
h
b
a
f
g
a
b
▪ a: At unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
b
c
a
c
d
f
e
g
Outdoor unit
Tank
Domestic hot water pump
Heater element
Non‑return valve
Shower
Cold water
Control box
▪ b: In room as room thermostat
INFORMATION
User interface location:
▪ At unit: the other user interface is
automatically set to In room and if RT
control is selected act as room
thermostat.
The correct domestic hot water default settings becomes
only applicable when domestic hot water operation is
activated ([E‑05]=1).
Remote outdoor sensor
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 12.
▪ In room (default): the other user
interface is automatically set to At unit
and if RT control is selected to act as
room thermostat.
[A.2.1.C]
[E-0D]
Glycol present:
▪ 0 (No) (default): No glycol was added
to the water circuit.
▪ 1 (Yes): Glycol was added to the water
circuit to protect it against freezing.
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options
External domestic hot water pump
This chapter only applies to systems with a domestic hot water tank
installed. A domestic hot water tank is available as an option.
Following settings must be made accordingly.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
53
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.2.2.B]
[C-08]
Description
External sensor (outdoor):
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 12.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the outdoor unit are used for
measurement.
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Remote outdoor
sensor, connected to the outdoor unit.
The outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
Backup heater
configuration
1
1 (1P,(1/1+2))
6V3
2
1 (1P,(1/1+2))
6W1
2
4 (3PN,(1/2))
9W1
2
5 (3PN,(1/1+2))
#
[A.2.2.E.4]
Code
[E-05]
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed. (Default)
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed
[A.2.2.E.5]
[C-05]
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF) (default): The
connected external room thermostat or
heat pump convector sends the
heating or cooling demand by the
same signal as it is connected to only
1 digital input (preserved for the main
leaving water temperature zone) on
the control box (X2M/1). Select this
value in case of a connection to the
heat pump convector (FWXV).
Control box EKCB07CAV3
Modification of these settings is only required when optional control
box EKCB07CAV3 is installed. Control box EKCB07CAV3 has
multiple functionalities which need to be configured. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 12.
[E‑03]
▪ 2 (H/C request): The connected
external room thermostat sends
separate heating and cooling demand
and is therefore connected to the 2
digital input (preserved for the main
leaving water temperature zone) on
the control box (X2M/1 and 1a). Select
this value in case of connection with
the wired (EKRTWA) or wireless
(EKRTR1) room thermostat.
Description
Backup heater steps:
▪ 0 (default)
▪ 1
▪ 2
[A.2.2.E.2]
[5-0D]
BUH type:
▪ 1 (1P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 1~ 230 V
(default)
▪ 4 (3PN,(1/2)): 6 kW 3N~ 400 V (*9W)
▪ 5 (3PN,(1/1+2)): 9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
The system allows for the connection of 2 types of backup heater
kits:
▪ EKMBUHCA3V3: 1~ 230 V - 3 kW backup heater
▪ EKMBUHCA9W1: Unified backup heater
Backup heater EKMBUHCA3V3 can only be configured to be a 3V3
backup heater. Unified backup heater EKMBUHCA9W1 can be
configured in 4 ways:
▪ 3V3: 1~ 230 V, 1 step of 3 kW
Contact type main
In external room thermostat control, the
contact type of the optional room
thermostat or heat pump convector for
the main leaving water temperature zone
must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 12.
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
[A.2.2.E.1]
Description
DHW operation:
Can the system prepare domestic hot
water?
INFORMATION
Code
[5-0D]
3V3
▪ 2 (Room sensor): Remote indoor
sensor, connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. The temperature
sensor in the user interface is NOT
used anymore. Remark: This value
has only meaning in room thermostat
control.
#
[E-03]
If there are two zones (main+additional),
then only Thermo ON/OFF is possible.
[A.2.2.E.6]
[C-06]
Contact type add.
In external room thermostat control with
2 leaving water temperature zones, the
type of the optional room thermostat for
the additional leaving water temperature
zone must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 12.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a).
▪ 2: N/A
If there are two zones (main+additional),
then only Thermo ON/OFF is possible.
▪ 6V3: 1~ 230 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+3 kW
Option box EK2CB07CAV3
▪ 6W1: 3N~ 400 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+3 kW
Modification of these settings is only required when option box
EK2CB07CAV3 is installed. Option box EK2CB07CAV3 has multiple
functionalities which need to be configured. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 12.
▪ 9W1: 3N~ 400 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+6 kW
To configure the backup heater (both EKMBUHCA3V3 and
EKMBUHCA9W1), combine settings [E‑03] and [5‑0D]:
Installer reference guide
54
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.2.F.1]
Code
[C-02]
Description
Ext. backup heat src
#
Code
[A.2.2.F.5]
[C-08]
Indicates if the space heating is also
performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 12.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 0 (No): (default) NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the outdoor unit are used for
measurement.
▪ 1 (Bivalent): Installed. The auxiliary
boiler (gas boiler, oil burner) will
operate when the outdoor ambient
temperature is low. During bivalent
operation, the heat pump is turned
OFF. Set this value in case an
auxililary boiler is used. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 12.
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Remote outdoor
sensor, connected to the outdoor unit.
The outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
▪ 2: N/A
▪ 3: N/A
[A.2.2.F.2]
[C-09]
Alarm output
▪ 2 (Room sensor): Remote indoor
sensor, connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. The temperature
sensor in the user interface is NOT
used anymore. Remark: This value
has only meaning in room thermostat
control.
Indicates the logic of the alarm output on
option box EK2CB07CAV3 during a
malfunction.
▪ 0 (Normally open)(default): The alarm
output will be powered when an alarm
occurs. By setting this value, a
distinction
is
made
between
malfunctioning and detection of a
power failure of the unit.
▪ 1 (Normally closed): The alarm output
will NOT be powered when an alarm
occurs. This installer setting allows for
a distinction between the detection of
an alarm, and the detection of a power
failure.
Also see the table below (Alarm output
logic).
[A.2.2.F.3]
[D-08]
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
[A.2.2.F.4]
[D-09]
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
#
[A.2.2.F.6]
Code
[D-04]
▪ 1 (Yes)
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy
metering)
The capacities of all electrical heaters must be set for the energy
metering and/or power consumption control feature to work properly.
When measuring the resistance value of each heater, you can set
the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more accurate energy
data.
#
Code
[A.2.3.1]
[6-02]
[A.2.3.2]
[6-03]
Optional external kWh meter 2:
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
Description
PCC by digital inputs:
▪ 0 (No)
Optional external kWh meter 1:
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
Description
External sensor (indoor):
Description
Booster heater: Only applies to domestic
hot water tanks with an internal booster
heater (EKHW). The capacity of the
booster heater at nominal voltage.
Nominal value is 3 kW. Default: 3 kW.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
BUH: step 1: The capacity of the first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value 3 kW. Default:
3 kW.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
55
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.3.3]
Code
[6-04]
Description
#
BUH: step 2: Only applies to a two-step
backup heater (*9W). The capacity
difference between the second and first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value depends on the
backup heater configuration. Default:
0 kW.
[A.3.1.1.1]
Code
N/A
Description
<< continuation
▪ 2 (Fixed/scheduled): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired shift actions, either preset
or custom.
▪ 3 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 0 kW
▪ 6 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 6 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ 9 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 6 kW (9 kW-3 kW)
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
8.2.5
▪ 3 (WD/scheduled): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
Space heating/cooling control
The basic required settings in order to configure the space heating/
cooling of your system are described in this chapter. The weatherdependent installer settings define the parameters for the weatherdependent operation of the unit. When weather-dependent operation
is active, the water temperature is determined automatically
depending on the outdoor temperature. Low outdoor temperatures
will result in warmer water and vice versa. During weatherdependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift up or down
the target water temperature by a maximum of 5°C.
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
See the user reference guide and/or operation manual for more
details about this function.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired
leaving
water
temperatures either preset or
custom.
Leaving water temperature: Main zone
#
[A.3.1.1.1]
Code
N/A
#
Description
[7.7.1.1]
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ 0 (Fixed)
The
desired
temperature is:
Code
[1-00]
[1-01]
leaving
water
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ 1 (Weather dep.) (default): The
desired leaving water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
Tt
[1-02]
[1-03]
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
[1-02]
[1-03]
[1-00]
[1-01]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
continued >>
Installer reference guide
56
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.1.1]
Code
#
Description
[7.7.1.2]
[1-00]
<< continuation
[1-01]
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. –40°C~+5°C (default: –
10°C)
[1-02]
[1-03]
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑01]~[9‑00]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-03] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑01]~min(45, [9‑00])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-02] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
#
[7.7.1.2]
Code
[1-06]
[1-07]
Description
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
Description
<< continuation
[1-07]
▪ [1-06]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-07]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[1‑08]
[1-09]
▪ [1-08]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑03]~[9‑02]°C (default: 22°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-09] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [1-09]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑03]~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-08] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Leaving water temperature: Additional zone
[1‑08]
[1-09]
Code
[1-06]
Only applicable if 2 leaving water temperature zones are present.
[1-08]
[1-09]
[1-06]
[1-07]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
57
8 Configuration
#
[A.3.1.2.1]
Code
N/A
#
Description
[7.7.2.1]
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed: The desired leaving water
temperature is:
Code
<< continuation
[0-01]
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. –40°C~+5°C (default: –
10°C)
[0-02]
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
[0-03]
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
#
[7.7.2.2]
Code
[0-04]
[0-05]
Description
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
[0-06]
[0-07]
[0-05]
[0-04]
[0-07]
#
[7.7.2.1]
Code
[0-00]
[0-01]
[0-06]
Description
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
[0-02]
[0-03]
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑05]~min(45, [9‑06])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0-01] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑05]~[9‑06]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0-00] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ Weather dep. (default): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
Description
[0-00]
continued >>
[0-01]
[0-00]
[0-03]
[0-02]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
Installer reference guide
58
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.2.2]
Code
Description
[0-04]
<< continuation
[0-05]
▪ [0-07]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-06]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[0-06]
[0-07]
▪ [0-05]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑07]~[9‑08]°C (default: 12°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑04] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures exactly
temperature (higher comfort level)
[A.3.1.3.1]
Code
[9-09]
#
Code
[A.3.1.1.5]
[8-05]
▪ 1 (Yes)(default): enabled. The
leaving
water
temperature
is
calculated according to the difference
between the desired and the actual
room temperature. This creates a
better match between the capacity of
the heat pump and the actual
required capacity, and results in less
start/stop cycles and a more
economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface
N/A
[8-06]
Requires modulation to be enabled.
This is the value by which the desired
leaving water temperature is increased
or lowered.
Description
Heating: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water.
Cooling: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water.
In case a minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of the heat emitters in cooling
mode.
INFORMATION
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
Tt
+[8-06]
−[8-06]
a
Range: 3°C~10°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 5°C).
b
Ta
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Leaving water temperature maximum
modulation:
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Range: 3°C~10°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 5°C).
[9-0A]
Description
Modulated LWT:
▪ 0 (No): disabled.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature needs to be set on the
user interface.
In case a minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of the heat emitters in heating
mode.
[A.3.1.3.2]
desired
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
Leaving water temperature: Delta T source
#
the
▪ less On/OFF cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ [0-04]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑07]~[9‑08]°C (default: 8°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0‑05] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Temperature difference for entering and leaving water. The unit is
designed to support under floor loops operation. The recommended
leaving water temperature (set by the user interface) for under floor
loops is 35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the entering water
to the unit is around 30°C. Depending on the installed application
(radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or situation, it
can be possible to change the difference between entering and
leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will regulate its flow
to keep the Δt.
matching
a
b
Weather-dependent curve
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
Installer reference guide
59
8 Configuration
Leaving water temperature: Emitter type
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. Depending on
the system water volume and the heat emitters type, the heat up or
cool down of a space can take longer. This setting can compensate
for a slow or a quick heating/cooling system during the heat up/cool
down cycle.
#
Code
[A.4.5]
[6-0E]
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
Note: The setting of the emitter type will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature and the
possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating changeover
based on the indoor ambient temperature.
Range: 40°C~80°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 60°C).
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly.
#
[A.3.1.1.7]
Code
[9-0B]
Description
8.2.7
Emitter type:
Reaction time of the system:
▪ Quick Example: Small water volume
and fan coils.
▪ Slow Example: Large water volume,
floor heating loops.
8.2.6
Configuring the desired tank temperature
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
#
Contact/helpdesk number
#
Code
[6.3.2]
N/A
Code
[6-0D]
Description
Domestic hot water Type:
▪ 0 (Reheat only): Only reheat operation
is allowed.
▪ 1 (Reheat + sched.): The domestic hot
water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heatup cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation:
advanced
Preset leaving water temperature
You can define preset leaving water temperatures:
▪ economic (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the lowest energy consumption)
▪ comfort (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the highest energy consumption).
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule or
to adjust the desired leaving water temperature according to the
room temperature (see modulation). If you later want to change the
value, you ONLY have to do it in one place. Depending on whether
the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent or NOT,
the desired shift values or the absolute desired leaving water
temperature should be specified.
NOTICE
The preset leaving water temperatures are ONLY
applicable for the main zone, as the schedule for the
additional zone consists of On/OFF actions.
See "8.3.2 Domestic hot water control: advanced" on page 64 for
more details.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
Advanced configuration/
optimization
▪ 2 (Scheduled only): The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
There is a risk of space heating (cooling) capacity
shortage/comfort problem (in case of frequent domestic hot
water operation, frequent and long space heating/cooling
interruption will happen) when selecting [6‑0D]=0 ([A.4.1]
Domestic hot water Type=Reheat only) in case of a
domestic hot water tank without an internal booster heater.
Select preset leaving water temperatures in accordance
with the design and selected heat emitters to ensure the
balance between desired room and leaving water
temperatures.
#
Code
[8-09]
[7.4.2.2]
[8-0A]
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
[7.4.2.3]
[8-07]
INFORMATION
[7.4.2.4]
[8-08]
Installer reference guide
60
Comfort (heating)
[9‑01]~[9‑00]°C (default: 45°C)
INFORMATION
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
Description
Preset leaving water temperature for the main leaving water
temperature zone in case of NOT weather dependent
[7.4.2.1]
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
Description
8.3
Domestic hot water control
Only applicable in case an optional domestic hot water tank is
installed.
[A.4.1]
Description
Maximum setpoint
Eco (heating)
[9‑01]~[9‑00]°C (default: 40°C)
Comfort (cooling)
[9‑03]~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C)
Eco (cooling)
[9‑03]~[9‑02]°C (default: 20°C)
Preset leaving water temperature (shift value) for the main leaving
water temperature zone in case of weather dependent
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
Code
[7.4.2.5]
N/A
Description
Comfort (heating)
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.2.4] [9-02]
Maximum temp (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
[7.4.2.6]
N/A
Eco (heating)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.3] [9-03]
Minimum temp (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: –2°C)
[7.4.2.7]
N/A
[7.4.2.8]
N/A
Comfort (cooling)
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Eco (cooling)
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
lowest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 2°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.2] [9-06]
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~55°C (default: 55°C)
Temperature ranges (leaving water temperatures)
The purpose of this setting is to prevent selecting a wrong (i.e. too
hot or too cold) leaving water temperature. Therefore the available
desired heating temperature range and desired cooling temperature
range can be configured.
[A.3.1.2.2.1] [9-05]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.4] [9-08]
Maximum temp (cooling)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
NOTICE
Minimum temp (cooling)
[A.3.1.2.2.3] [9-07]
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling
operation to 18~20°C to prevent condensation on the
floor.
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will startup again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
NOTICE
Code
N/A
Description
[9-04]
1°C~4°C (default: 1°C)
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
Tt
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures MUST be sufficiently higher than the room
temperatures (in heating).
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased around an outdoor temperature of 0°C. This
compensation can be selected when using an absolute or a weather
dependent desired temperature (see illustration below). Use this
setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the building due to
the evaporation of melted ice or snow (e.g. in cold region countries).
Tt
L
L
R
R
0°C
TA
0°C
a
b
a
b
#
N/A
TA
Absolute desired LWT
Weather dependent desired LWT
Code
[D-03]
Description
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C)
▪ 2 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C) (default)
▪ 3 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
#
Code
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
highest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
[A.3.1.1.2.2] [9-00]
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~55°C (default: 55°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.1] [9-01]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
▪ 4 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when modulation is
enabled. The maximum modulation (=variance) on the desired
leaving water temperature decided on the difference between the
actual and desired room temperature, e.g. 3°C modulation means
the desired leaving water temperature can be increased or lowered
by 3°C. Increasing the modulation results in better performance (less
On/OFF, faster heat up), but note that depending on the heat
Installer reference guide
61
8 Configuration
emitter, there MUST ALWAYS be a balance (refer to the design and
selection of the heat emitters) between the desired leaving water
temperature and the desired room temperature.
#
Code
N/A
[8-06]
Description
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Room temperature hysteresis
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. The hysteresis
band around the desired room temperature is settable. It is
recommended NOT to change the room temperature hysteresis as it
is set for an optimal use of the system.
a
Weather dependent cooling allowance
ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3. It is possible to disable
weather dependent cooling, meaning the desired leaving water
temperature in cooling operation does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature and this regardless whether weather
dependent is selected or NOT. Both for the main leaving water
temperature zone as for the additional leaving water temperature
zone, this can be set separately.
#
Code
N/A
[1-04]
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
N/A
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the
additional leaving water temperature
zone is…
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
Temperature ranges (room temperature)
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control. In order to save energy
by preventing overheating or undercooling the room, you can limit
the range of the room temperature, both for heating and/or cooling.
NOTICE
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired
room temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are
between the limits.
#
Code
Description
Room temp. range
[A.3.2.1.2]
[3-06]
Maximum temp (heating)
18°C~30°C (default: 30°C)
[A.3.2.1.1]
[3-07]
d
a
b
c
d
Minimum temp (heating)
Room temperature
Actual room temperature
Desired room temperature
Time
#
Description
Weather dependent cooling of the main
leaving water temperature zone is…
b
c
[9-0C]
Code
N/A
[9-0C]
Description
1°C~6°C (default: 1°C)
Room temperature offset
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor. It is possible to
give an offset to the room thermistor value measured by the user
interface or by the external room sensor. The settings can be used
to compensate for situations where the user interface or external
room sensor CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation manual and/or installer reference guide).
#
Code
Description
Room temp. offset: Offset on the actual room temperature
measured on the user interface sensor.
[A.3.2.2]
[2-0A]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Ext. room sensor offset: ONLY applicable if the external room
sensor option is installed and configured (see [C-08])
[A.3.2.3]
[2-09]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Room frost protection
Room frost protection prevents the room from getting too cold. This
setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control method
([C‑07]). Perform actions according to the table below:
Unit control method ([C‑07])
Room thermostat control
([C‑07]=2)
12°C~18°C (default: 16°C)
[A.3.2.1.4]
[3-08]
▪ Set [2‑06] to "1"
Maximum temp (cooling)
▪ Set
the
room
temperature ([2‑05]).
25°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
[A.3.2.1.3]
[3-09]
Minimum temp (cooling)
15°C~25°C (default: 15°C)
▪ Turn ON the leaving water
temperature home page.
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when the
temperature is displayed in °C.
[A.3.2.4]
Code
N/A
▪ Set auto emergency ([A.5.1.2])
to "1".
Description
Room temp. step
▪ 1°C (default). The desired room
temperature on the user interface is
settable per 1°C.
▪ 0.5°C. The desired room temperature
on the user interface is settable per
0.5°C. The actual room temperature is
displayed with an accuracy of 0.1°C.
antifrost
External room thermostat control Allow for the external room
([C‑07]=1)
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
Room temperature step
#
Room frost protection
Allow for the room thermostat to
take care of room frost
protection:
Leaving water temperature
control ([C‑07]=0)
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
NOTICE
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, do NOT
change the default room antifrost temperature.
INFORMATION
If an U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Refer to the sections below for detailed information on room frost
protection in relation to the applicable unit control method.
Installer reference guide
62
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
[C‑07]=2: room thermostat control
In case of…
Under room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed,
even if the room temperature home page is OFF on the user
interface. When room frost protection ([2‑06]) is enabled and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature
([2‑05]), the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat
up the room again.
#
N/A
Code
[2-06]
One leaving water temperature
zone
Description
Room frost protection
▪ 0: disabled
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the external room thermostat
is "Thermo OFF" and the
outdoor ambient temperature
drops below 4°C, then the unit
will supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered by 5°C.
▪ 1: enabled (default)
N/A
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
4°C~16°C (default: 16°C)
INFORMATION
If an U5 error occurs:
▪ when 1 user interface is connected, room frost
protection is NOT guaranteed,
▪ when 2 user interfaces are connected and the second
user interface used for room temperature control is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable),
then room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON
and
the
external
room
thermostat is "Thermo ON",
then room frost protection is
guaranteed by the normal
logic.
NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.5.1.2]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the user interface
will ask confirmation before starting. Room frost protection
is active even if the user does NOT confirm emergency
operation.
…then the following applies:
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered by 5°C.
Two leaving water temperature
zones
[C‑07]=1: external room thermostat control
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that the
leaving water temperature home page is ON on the user interface,
and the auto emergency setting ([A.5.1.2]) is set to "1".
Additionally, limited frost protection by the unit is possible:
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF, and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered by 5°C.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the
operation
mode
is
"heating", and the outdoor
ambient temperature drops
below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered by 5°C.
▪ The selection of "cooling" or
"heating" is done via the user
interface. When the leaving
water temperature home page
is ON and the operation mode
is "cooling", then there is no
protection.
NOTICE
For the (limited) frost protection to be possible, auto
emergency MUST be set to Automatic ([A.5.1.2]=1).
[C‑07]=0: leaving water temperature control
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if [2‑06] is set to "1", limited frost
protection by the unit is possible:
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
63
8 Configuration
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is OFF and the
outdoor ambient temperature drops below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water temperature setpoint will be lowered
by 5°C.
When the outdoor temperature is between the space cooling On and
the space heating OFF temperature, the operation mode remains
unchanged unless the system is configured in room thermostat
control with one leaving water temperature zone and quick heat
emitters. In that case, the operation mode will change based on:
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "heating", then the unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up the room according to normal logic.
▪ Measured indoor temperature: besides the heating and the
cooling desired room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis
value (e.g. when in heating, this value is related to the desired
cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when in heating,
this value is related to the desired heating temperature). Example:
the desired room temperature in heating is 22°C and in cooling
24°C, with a hysteresis value of 1°C and an offset of 4°C.
Changeover from heating to cooling will occur when the room
temperature rises above the maximum of the desired cooling
temperature added by the hysteresis value (thus 25°C) and the
desired heating temperature added by the offset value (thus
26°C). Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will occur
when the room temperature drops below the minimum of the
desired heating temperature subtracted by the hysteresis value
(thus 21°C) and the desired cooling temperature subtracted by the
offset value (thus 20°C).
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "cooling", then there is no protection.
NOTICE
For the (limited) frost protection to be possible, auto
emergency MUST be set to Automatic ([A.5.1.2]=1).
Shut-off valve
The shut-off valve is in the main leaving water temperature zone,
and is connected to the heating/cooling output.
NOTICE
The output of the shut‑off valve is NOT configurable. Do
NOT change the value of setting [F‑0B]. Only connect NO
(normal open) shut‑off valves.
▪ Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to
cooling and vice versa.
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating or space cooling is prohibited.
Space heating OFF temp: When the averaged outdoor temperature
rises above this value, space heating is turned OFF to avoid
overheating.
#
[A.3.3.1]
Code
[4-02]
Changeover settings related to the outdoor temperature (ONLY
when automatic is selected):
#
Code
[A.3.3.1]
[4-02]
[A.3.3.2]
[F-01]
Description
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
#
[A.3.3.2]
Code
[F-01]
Description
10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
Range: 10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
N/A
[4-0B]
Automatic heating/cooling changeover
▪ Monthly allowance for heating and/or cooling: the end-user
indicates on a monthly base which operation is allowed ([7.5]: both
heating/cooling or heating ONLY or cooling ONLY). If the allowed
operation mode changes to cooling ONLY, the operation mode
changes to cooling. If the allowed operation mode changes to
heating ONLY, the operation mode changes to heating.
▪ Averaged outdoor temperature: the operation mode will be
changed in order to ALWAYS be within range determined by the
space heating OFF temperature for heating and the space cooling
On temperature for cooling. If the outdoor temperature drops, the
operation mode switches to heating and vice versa. Note that the
outdoor
temperature
will
be
time-averaged
(see
"8 Configuration" on page 49).
Space cooling On temp. If the outdoor
temperature drops below this value, the
operation mode will change to heating:
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature. ONLY
applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured
in room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone
and quick heat emitters.
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3. The end-user sets the
desired operation mode on the user interface: Heating, Cooling or
Automatic (see also operation manual/user reference guide). When
Automatic is selected, the changing of the operation mode is based
on:
Space heating OFF temp. If the outdoor
temperature rises above this value, the
operation mode will change to cooling:
Range: 14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
Space cooling On temp: ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3.
When the averaged outdoor temperature drops below this value,
space cooling is turned OFF.
Description
Hysteresis: Ensures that changeover is
ONLY done when necessary. Example:
the space operation mode ONLY
changes from cooling to heating when
the room temperature drops below the
desired heating temperature subtracted
by the hysteresis.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
1°C)
N/A
[4-0D]
Offset: Ensures that the active desired
room temperature can be reached.
Example: if heating to cooling
changeover would occur below the
desired room temperature in heating, this
desired room temperature could never
be reached.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
3°C)
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced
Preset tank temperatures
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
or scheduled + reheat.
You can define preset tank temperatures:
▪ storage economic
Installer reference guide
64
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
▪ storage comfort
#
▪ reheat
[A.4.7]
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule. If
you later want to change the value, you only have to do it in 1 place
(see also operation manual and/or user reference guide).
Storage comfort: When programming the schedule, you can make
use of the tank temperatures set as preset values. The tank will then
heat up until these setpoint temperatures have been reached.
Additionally, a storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a
stop to tank heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached.
Only program a storage stop when tank heating is absolutely
undesirable.
#
[7.4.3.1]
Code
[6-0A]
Description
30°C~[6‑0E]°C (default: 55°C)
Storage eco: The storage economic temperature denotes the lower
desired tank temperature. It is the desired temperature when a
storage economic action is scheduled (preferably during day).
#
[7.4.3.2]
Code
[6-0B]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat: The desired reheat tank temperature is used:
▪ in reheat mode or scheduled + reheat mode: The guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by THP OFF–[6‑08], which is either
[6‑0C] or the weather dependent setpoint, minus the reheat
hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value, the tank
is heated up.
#
[7.4.3.3]
Code
[6-0C]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Code
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
Description
Weather-dependent curve
TDHW
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
[0-0B]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
ambient
temperature: –40°C~5°C (default: –
10°C)
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
temperature: 10°C~25°C
15°C)
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises above the high ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
55°C)
Booster heater and heat pump operation
The weather dependent installer settings define the parameters for
the weather dependent operation of the unit. When weather
dependent operation is active the desired tank temperature is
determined automatically depending on the averaged outdoor
temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher desired
tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice versa. In
case of scheduled or scheduled+reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent. In case of
reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired tank
temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the enduser cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface.
For systems with a domestic hot water tank
#
Code
N/A
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops below the low ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
60°C)
Weather dependent
[A.4.6]
Ta
Description
Weather dependent desired tank
temperature is:
▪ Fixed (default): disabled. All desired
tank temperature are NOT weather
dependent.
▪ Weather dep.: enabled. In scheduled
or scheduled+reheat mode, the
storage comfort temperature is
weather dependent. Storage economic
and reheat temperatures are NOT
weather dependent. In reheat mode,
the desired tank temperature is
weather dependent.
Note: When the displayed tank
temperature is weather dependent, it
cannot be adjusted on the user
interface.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
65
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[4-03]
#
Description
Defines the operation permission of the
booster heater depending on ambient,
domestic hot water temperature or
operation mode of heat pump. This
setting is only applicable in reheat mode
for applications with a domestic hot water
tank.
▪ 0: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed except for "Disinfection
function" and "Powerful domestic
water heating".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting [5-03] and [5-02]=1, the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
[7-01]
N/A
[6-00]
N/A
[6-01]
TDHW
60
THP MAX 50
THP OFF 48
If bivalent operation is enabled and
permission signal for auxiliary boiler is
ON, the booster heater will be restricted
even when Ta<[5-03]. See [C-02].
▪ 3 (default): The booster heater is
allowed when the heat pump is NOT
active in domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous
heat pump domestic hot water
operation
and
booster
heater
operation is not allowed.
When setting [4-03]=1/2/3, the booster
heater operation can still be restricted by
the booster heater allowance schedule.
N/A
[7-00]
Overshoot temperature. Temperature
difference above the domestic hot water
set point temperature before the booster
heater is turned OFF. The domestic hot
water tank temperature will increase with
[7-00] above selected temperature
set point.
[6-00]
30
20
HP
10
BH
TU
[7-00]
[6-01]
[6-00]
= 70°C
= 3°C
= 2°C
= 7°C
HP
5
t
BH
HP
TBH OFF
TBH ON
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Description
The booster heater will be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5-03] depends of the
status of [5-02].
[6-01]
THP ON 41
40
continued >>
<< continuation
[7-01]
[7-00]
TBH OFF 73
TBH ON 71
TU 70
▪ Domestic hot water temperature is
2°C lower than the heat pump OFF
temperature.
Code
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
Range: 0°C~10°C (default: 2°C)
▪ Ambient temperature is out of the
operating range: Ta<[5-03] or
Ta>35°C
[4-03]
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump ON temperature.
Range: 2°C~20°C (default: 2°C)
▪ 2: The booster heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat
pump for domestic hot water
operation.
Booster heater operation is only
allowed if:
#
Description
Hysteresis. Temperature difference
between booster heater ON and booster
heater OFF temperature. The minimum
hysteresis temperature is 2°C.
Range: 2°C~40°C (default: 2°C)
▪ 1: Booster heater operation is allowed
when required.
N/A
Code
N/A
Booster heater
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
Booster heater OFF temperature (TU+[7-00])
Booster heater ON temperature (TBH OFF−[7-01])
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
Timers for simultaneous request space and domestic hot water
operation
#
Code
Description
N/A
[8-00]
Do not change. (default: 1)
N/A
[8-01]
Maximum running time for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
▪ When system layout = Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
only taken into account if there is a
request for space heating or cooling. If
there is NO request for space heating/
cooling, the tank is heated until the
setpoint has been reached.
▪ When system layout ≠ Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
always taken into account.
Range: 5~95 minutes (default: 30)
Range: 0°C~4°C (default: 0°C)
Installer reference guide
66
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
Code
N/A
[8-02]
Description
Anti-recycling time.
Minimum time between two cycles for
domestic hot water. The actual antirecycling time also depends on setting
[8-04].
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 3) (step: 1/2
hour).
N/A
[8-03]
1
4
0
1
3
0
1
Remark: The minimum time is 1/2 hour
even when the selected value is 0.
0
Booster heater delay timer.
1
Only for EKHW
0
Start-up delay time for the booster heater
when domestic hot water mode is active.
1
2
▪ The delay time starts from booster
heater ON temperature.
▪ By adapting the booster heater delay
time versus the maximum running
time, you can find an optimal balance
between the energy efficiency and the
heat up time.
▪ If the booster heater delay time is set
too high, it might take a long time
before the domestic hot water reaches
its set temperature.
▪ The setting [8-03] is only meaningful if
setting [4-03]=1. Setting [4-03]=0/2/3
limits the booster heater automatically
in relation to heat pump operation time
in domestic water heating mode.
▪ Make sure that [8-03] is always in
relation with the maximum running
time [8-01].
Range: 20~95 (default: 50).
N/A
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum
running time depending on the outdoor
temperature [4-02] or [F-01].
3
4
t
Booster heater operation (1=active, 0=not active)
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for booster heater (1=request, 0=no
request)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
[8-04]: Additional running time at [4-02]/[F-01]
t
t
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-02]
[8-02]
[8-01]
[8-01]
0
[5-03]
TA
t
[4-02]
TA
0
[F-01]
35°C
TA
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
Time
Anti-recycle time
Maximum running current
Disinfection
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
CAUTION
Range: 0~95 minutes (default: 95).
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
[8-02]: Anti-recycling time
#
1
t
[8-03]
▪ When domestic hot water mode is
NOT active, the delay time is
20 minutes.
[A.4.4.2]
Code
[2‑00]
Description
Operation day:
▪ 0: Each day
0
▪ 1: Monday
1
▪ 2: Tuesday
0
▪ 3: Wednesday
[8-00]
[8-01]
1
2
t
▪ 4: Thursday
[8-02]
▪ 5: Friday
t
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
▪ 6: Saturday
▪ 7: Sunday
[A.4.4.1]
[2‑01]
[8-03]: Booster heater delay timer
Disinfection
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
[A.4.4.3]
[2‑02]
Start time: 00~23:00, step: 1:00.
[A.4.4.4]
[2‑03]
Temperature target:
Range: 55°C~80°C (default: 70°C).
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
67
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.4.4.5]
[2‑04]
INFORMATION
Description
Duration:
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
Range: 5~60 minutes (default: 10
minutes).
TDHW
INFORMATION
[2-03]
An AH error occurs if you do the following during
disinfection:
[2-04]
TH
▪ Set the user permission level to Installer.
▪ Go to the DHW tank temperature home page (Tank).
TU
to interrupt the disinfection.
▪ Press
8.3.3
00.00
01.00
22.00
23.00
24.00
t
[2-02]
TDHW
TU
TH
t
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature
High set point temperature [2-03]
Time
WARNING
Heat source settings
Backup heater
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is enabled or disabled. This setting is only overruled when
backup heating is required during defrost operation or malfunctioning
of the outdoor unit (when [A.5.1.2] is enabled).
#
[A.5.1.1]
Code
[4‑00]
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
▪ 0: Disabled
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
[A.5.1.3]
[4‑07]
▪ 0: NOT allowed
In this way it is possible to limit the
backup heater capacity.
N/A
[5-00]
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [A.4.4.3]
with defined duration [A.4.4.5] is NOT interrupted by
possible domestic hot water demand.
The booster heater permission schedule is used to restrict
or allow booster heater operation based on a weekly
program. Advice: In order to avoid unsuccessful
disinfection function, at least allow the booster heater (by
the weekly program) for minimum 4 hours starting from the
scheduled start-up of disinfection. If the booster heater is
restricted during disinfection, this function will NOT be
successful and the applicable warning AH will be
generated.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
Defines whether backup heater second
step is:
▪ 1: Allowed
CAUTION
CAUTION
Description
Backup heater operation:
Is backup heater operation allowed
above equilibrium temperature during
space heating operation?
▪ 1: NOT allowed
▪ 0: Allowed
[A.5.1.4]
[5‑01]
Equilibrium temperature.
Outdoor temperature below which
operation of the backup heater is
allowed.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: –4°C)
(step: 1°C)
Auto emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate the backup heater can serve as
an emergency heater and either automatically or non-automatically
take over the heat load. When auto emergency is set to Automatic
and a heat pump failure occurs, the backup heater will automatically
take over the heat load. When a heat pump failure occurs and auto
emergency is set to Manual the domestic hot water and space
heating operations will stop and need to be recovered manually. The
user interface will then ask you to confirm whether the backup heater
can take over the heat load or not. When the heat pump fails, will
appear on the user interface. If the house is unattended for longer
periods, we recommend that setting [A.5.1.2] Emergency shall be
set to Automatic.
#
[A.5.1.2]
Code
N/A
Description
Defines whether in an emergency
situation the backup heater is allowed to
automatically take over the entire heat
load or whether manual confirmation is
required.
▪ 0: Manual (default)
▪ 1: Automatic
Installer reference guide
68
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
INFORMATION
Code
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
[7.4.5.2]
INFORMATION
[7.4.5.3]
N/A
[7.4.6]
N/A
If a heat pump failure occurs and [A.5.1.2] is set to Manual,
the room frost protection function, the underfloor heating
screed dryout function, and the water pipe antifreeze
function will remain active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
N/A
Description
What is the medium electricity
price?
What is the low electricity
price?
What is the fuel price?
NOTICE
Bivalent
Do NOT use overview settings!
Applies only to installations with an auxiliary boiler (alternating
operation, parallel connected). The purpose of this function is to
determine — based on the outdoor temperature (possibility 1) or on
energy prices (possibility 2) — which heating source can/will provide
the space heating, either the outdoor unit or an auxiliary boiler.
Depending on the energy prices, this equilibrium point T changes
between a range of [C‑04].
When TA reaches the Teq point, then the bivalent heat source
permission will be active. To prevent too much switching, there is a
hysteresis of 3°C.
The field setting "bivalent operation" applies only to the space
heating operation of the outdoor unit and the permission signal for
the auxiliary boiler.
▪ [C‑03] ON temperature. Below this temperature, bivalent will
always be ON. The equilibrium point is ignored.
Possibility 1
▪ [C‑04] Operation range between which the equilibrium point is
calculated.
The installer can set an equilibrium temperature below which the
boiler will always operate when the electricity prices (High, Medium,
Low) are "0" in the menu structure.
3°C
a
b
NOTICE
[C-03]
Do NOT use overview settings!
Teq
TA
Teq
a
b
When the "bivalent operation" function is enabled, the outdoor unit
will stop automatically with space heating operation when the
outdoor temperature drops below the "bivalent ON temperature",
and the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active.
#
[C-03]+[C-04]
TA
Outdoor temperature
Equilibrium temperature
Closed
Open
Code
Description
When the bivalent operation function is disabled, space heating
operation by the outdoor unit is possible at all outdoor temperatures
(see operation ranges), and the permission signal for the auxiliary
boiler is ALWAYS deactivated.
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
▪ [C‑03] Bivalent ON temperature: defines the outdoor temperature
below which the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler will be
active (closed, X8M/3+4 on option box EK2CB07CAV3) and
space heating by the outdoor unit will be stopped.
To have an optimal operation when choosing possibility 2, it is for
[C‑04] recommended to choose a higher value than the default
value. Depending on the used boiler, the boiler efficiency should be
chosen as follows:
▪ [C‑04] Bivalent hysteresis: defines the temperature difference
between bivalent ON temperature and bivalent OFF temperature.
Permission signal X8M/3+4 (on option box EK2CB07CAV3)
#
[A.6.A]
Code
[7‑05]
Description
▪ 0: Very high
▪ 1: High
a
[C-04]
▪ 2: Medium
b
▪ 3: Low
TA
[C-03]
TA
a
b
#
▪ 4: Very low
Outdoor temperature
Closed
Open
Code
INFORMATION
Description
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
Possibility 2
The installer can set an equilibrium temperature based on energy
prices when energy prices [7.4.5] and [7.4.6] are changed in the
menu structure.
#
[7.4.5.1]
Code
N/A
Description
What is the high electricity
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([A.2.2.6.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in
menu structure [7.4.5.1], [7.4.5.2] and [7.4.5.3]. Do NOT
use overview settings.
INFORMATION
Boiler efficiency [A.6.A] or [7‑05] becomes visible when
bivalent is ON ([A.2.2.6.1] or [C‑02]).
CAUTION
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
price?
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
69
8 Configuration
#
INFORMATION
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
N/A
Code
[C-01]
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the outdoor unit.
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on X8M/3+4 of option box EK2CB07CAV3. When it is
activated, contact X8M/3+4 is closed. When it is
deactivated, X8M/3+4 is open. See the illustration
below for the schematic location of this contact.
▪ 0: The operation mode with the
highest request has priority.
▪ 1: Always space heating/cooling has
priority.
Auto-restart
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the user interface settings at the time of the power
failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable this function.
If the power supply might get interrupted (e.g. preferential kWh rate
power supply), always enable the auto restart function. Continuous
control of the hydro part of the outdoor unit can be guaranteed
independent of the preferential kWh rate power supply status, by
connecting the hydro part of the outdoor unit to a normal kWh rate
power supply.
X8M
34
#
[A.6.1]
8.3.4
Code
[3‑00]
System settings
▪ 1 (default): Yes
For systems with a domestic hot water tank
#
Code
[5-02]
Description
Space heating priority.
Defines whether domestic hot water is
made by booster heater only when
outdoor temperature is below space
heating priority temperature. It is
recommended to enable this function to
shorten tank heating operation time
and guaranteed domestic hot water
comfort.
▪ 0: disabled
▪ 1: enabled
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
N/A
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the domestic hot water will be
heated by booster heater only.
Range: 15°C~35°C (default: 0°C).
N/A
Description
Is the auto restart function of the unit
allowed?
▪ 0: No
Priorities
N/A
Description
If there is a simultaneous demand for
space heating/cooling and domestic hot
water heating (by heat pump), which
operation mode has priority?
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot
water temperature: set point correction
for the desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
Preferential kWh rate power supply
#
[A.2.1.6]
Code
[D‑01]
Description
Connection to a preferential kWh rate
power supply:
▪ 0 (default): The refrigerant part of the
outdoor unit is connected to a normal
power supply.
▪ 1: The refrigerant part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a preferential kWh
rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by
the electricity company, the contact
will open and the unit will go in forced
off mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
close and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
▪ 2: The refrigerant part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a preferential kWh
rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by
the electricity company, the contact
will close and the unit will go in forced
off mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
open and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
Range: 0°C~20°C (default: 10°C).
Installer reference guide
70
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.6.2.1]
[D‑00]
Description
Which heaters are allowed to operate
during preferential kWh rate power
supply?
▪ 0 (default): None
Power consumption control
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 12 for detailed information
about this functionality.
Pwr consumpt. control
#
▪ 1: Booster heater only
[A.6.3.1]
Code
[4-08]
▪ 2: Backup heater only
▪ 0 (No limitation)(default): Disabled.
▪ 3: All heaters
▪ 1 (Continuous): Enabled: You can
set one power limitation value (in A
or kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
See table below.
Settings 1, 2 and 3 are only meaningful if
the preferential kWh rate power supply is
of type 1 or the hydro part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a normal kWh rate
power supply (via X3M/5+6) and the
backup heater and booster heater are
NOT connected to the preferential kWh
rate power supply.
[D‑00]
Booster heater
0 (default)
Forced OFF
1
Permitted
2
Forced OFF
3
Permitted
Backup heater
Forced OFF
▪ 2 (Digital inputs): Enabled: You can
set up to four different power
limitation values (in A or kW) to
which
the
system
power
consumption will be limited when the
corresponding digital input asks.
[A.6.3.2]
[4-09]
Forced OFF
Permitted
Type:
▪ 0 (Current): The limitation values are
set in A.
Compressor
▪ 1 (Power)(default): The limitation
values are set in kW.
[A.6.3.3]
[5-05]
[A.6.3.4]
[5-09]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
Power saving function
Defines whether the power supply of the refrigerant part of the
outdoor unit can be interrupted (internally by Hydro part control)
during stand-still conditions (no space heating/cooling nor domestic
hot water demand). The final decision to allow power interruption of
the outdoor unit during standstill depends on the ambient
temperature, compressor conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be
enabled on the user interface in combination with the removal of the
power saving connector at the outdoor unit.
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Amp. limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on current values.
[A.6.3.5.1]
[5-05]
Limit DI1
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.2]
[5-06]
NOTICE
Limit DI2
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
The power saving connector at the outdoor unit shall only
be removed when the main power supply to the application
is switched OFF.
[A.6.3.5.3]
[5-07]
[A.6.3.5.4]
[5-08]
Limit DI3
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
Limit DI4
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
1
2
Description
Mode:
kW limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on power values.
3
[A.6.3.6.1]
[5-09]
Limit DI1
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.2]
[5-0A]
Limit DI2
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.3]
[5-0B]
Limit DI3
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.4]
#
N/A
Code
[E‑08]
Description
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: Disabled
[5-0C]
Limit DI4
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Priority: Only applicable in case of an optional EKHW.
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
71
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Description
INFORMATION
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
If the power saving function is activated (see [E‑08]), the
average outdoor temperature calculation is only possible in
case the external outdoor temperature sensor is used. See
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on
page 24.
▪ 0 (None)(default): Backup heater and
booster
heater
can
operate
simultaneously.
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized.
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized.
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1 or 2
▪ 0 (None)(default): Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
▪ 1 (BSH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the backup heater will
be limited first, before the booster
heater is limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Note: In case power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models), setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and booster
heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/backup
heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
In case power consumption control is ENABLED, setting [4‑01]
defines the priority of the electrical heaters depending on the
applicable limitation.
#
Code
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Description
▪ 0 (None)(default): No heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the booster heater
will be limited first.
Offset temperature external outdoor ambient sensor
Only applicable in case of an external outdoor ambient sensor is
installed and configured.
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. The setting can
be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation).
#
[A.6.5]
Code
[2‑0B]
Average timer
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
#
[A.6.4]
Code
[1-0A]
You can manually start a defrost operation.
The decision to execute the manual defrost operation is made by the
outdoor unit and depends on ambient and heat exchanger
conditions. When the outdoor unit accepted the forced defrost
operation,
will be displayed on the user interface. If
is NOT
displayed within 6 minutes after forced defrost operation was
enabled, the outdoor unit ignored the forced defrost request.
#
[A.6.6]
Code
N/A
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by [4‑02] or if
the outdoor temperature drops below the value set by [F‑01]. When
the pump operation is enabled, the pump operation is possible at all
outdoor temperatures.
#
N/A
Code
[F‑00]
Description
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01]
depending
on
heating/cooling
operation mode.
▪ 1:
Possible
temperatures.
at
all
outdoor
Pump operation during flow abnormality [F‑09] defines whether the
pump stops at flow abnormality or allow to continue operation when
flow abnormality occurs. This functionality is only valid in specific
conditions where it is preferable to keep the pump active when
Ta<4°C (pump will be activated for 10 minutes and deactivated after
10 minutes). Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage
resulting this functionality.
#
N/A
Code
[F‑09]
Description
Description
Pump continue operation when flow
abnormality:
▪ 0: Pump will be deactivated.
Outdoor average timer:
▪ 1: Pump will be activated when
Ta<4°C (10 minutes ON – 10 minutes
OFF)
▪ 1: 12 hours
▪ 2: 24 hours
INFORMATION
▪ 3: 48 hours
If glycol is present in the system ([E‑0D] set to "1") and a
flow abnormality occurs, then [F‑09] will have NO effect,
and the pump will continue operation (intervals of 20
minutes ON – 4 minutes OFF).
▪ 4: 72 hours
72
Description
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
Pump operation
▪ 0: No averaging (default)
Installer reference guide
–5°C~5°C, step: 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Forced defrost
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the backup heater
(step 1 and/or step 2) will be limited
first, before the booster heater is
limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Description
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
Pump speed limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
#
N/A
Code
[9‑0D]
Description
Pump speed limitation
▪ 0: No limitation.
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 5~8 (default: 6): Limitation when no
actuators. When there is no heating/
cooling output, the pump speed
limitation is applicable. When there is
heating/cooling output, the pump
speed is only determined by delta T in
relation to the required capacity. With
this limitation range, delta T is
possible
and
the
comfort
is
guaranteed.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
73
8 Configuration
8.4
[1]
Menu structure: Overview user settings
Set time/date
Date
Time
Daylight Saving Time
Clock type
[2]
Holiday
<>
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Use day schedule
Home
[3]
Quiet mode
[4]
Operation mode
[5]
Select schedules
[2]
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Operation mode
Heating
Cooling
DHW
Away
Room temperature
LWT main
LWT additional
Tank temperature
[6]
Information
Sensor information
Energy metering
Error handling
User permission level
Actuators
Operation modes
Running hours
Version
[6.2]
Produced energy
[6.3]
User settings
Display
Temperature lock
Set schedules
Preset values
Allowed operation mode
Unit of measurement
Set weather dependent
Error information
Error history
Contact/helpdesk number
Warning history
[6.8]
[7]
Energy metering
Consumed elec.
Version
User interface
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
[7.1]
Display
Contrast
Backlit LCD time
User profile
Available home pages
[7.3]
Set schedules
Room temp.
LWT main
LWT additional
DHW temp
Booster heater permission
Quiet mode
DHW pump
[7.4]
Preset values
Room temperature
LWT main
Tank temperature
Quiet level
[7.7]
Set weather dependent
Main
Additional
[7.7.1] Main
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
[7.7.2] Additional
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
Installer reference guide
74
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
8.5
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[A] Installer settings
Language
System layout
Space operation
Domestic hot water (DHW)
Heat sources
System operation
Commissioning
Overview settings
[A.2] System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
[A.2.1] Standard
Unit type
Compressor type
Indoor software type
Unit control method
Number of LWT zones
Pump operation mode
Power saving possible
User interface location
Glycol present
[A.2.2] Options
DHW pump
External sensor
Control box
Option box
[A.2.2.E] Control box
Backup heater steps
BUH type
Preferential kWh rate
DHW operation
Contact type main
Contact type add.
[A.2.2.F] Option box
[A.3] Space operation
LWT settings
Room thermostat
Operation range
[A.3.1] Leaving water
Main
Additional
Delta T source
[A.3.2] Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Room temp. offset
Ext. room sensor offset
Room temp. step
[A.4] Domestic hot water
Type
Disinfection
Maximum setpoint
SP mode
Weather-dependent curve
[A.5] Heat sources
Backup heater
[A.6] System operation
Auto restart
Preferential kWh rate
Pwr consumpt. control
Averaging time
Ext amb. sensor offset
Forced defrost
[A.3.3] Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
Space cooling On temp
[A.4.4] Disinfection
Disinfection
Operation day
Start time
Temperature target
Duration
Ext. backup heat src
Alarm output
External kWh meter
External kWh meter
External sensor
PCC by digital inputs
[A.3.1.1] Main
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
Modulated LWT
Emitter type
[A.3.1.2] Additional
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
[A.3.1.3] Delta T source
Heating
Cooling
[A.5.1] Backup heater
Operation mode
Emergency
Enable BUH step 2
Equilibrium temp.
[A.6.2] Prefer. kWh rate PS
Allowed heaters
Forced pump OFF
[A.6.3] Pwr consmp ctrl
[A.7] Commissioning
Test run
UFH screed dryout
Air purge
Actuator test run
Mode
Type
Amp. value
kW value
Amp. limits for DI
kW limits for DI
Priority
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
75
9 Commissioning
9
9.1
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
Commissioning
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
Overview: Commissioning
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the outdoor unit.
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
Depending on the backup heater type, backup heater
circuit breaker F1B (on the switch box of the backup
heater) is turned ON.
Typical workflow
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
2
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
Performing an air purge.
3
Performing a test run for the system.
4
5
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
Only for tanks with built-in booster heater:
Booster heater circuit breaker F2B (on the switch box of
the control box) is turned ON.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
There are no water leaks inside the outdoor unit.
9.2
Precautions when commissioning
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
INFORMATION
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume" in
"6.3 Preparing water piping" on page 26.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([4‑0E]), that disables automatic operation by the unit. At
first installation, setting [4‑0E] is by default set to "1",
meaning automatic operation is disabled. All protective
functions are then disabled too. To enable automatic
operation and the protective functions, set [4‑0E] to "0".
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
9.3
Checklist before commissioning
12 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set [4‑0E] to "0", ending "installer-on-site" mode and
enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set [4‑0E] to "1" manually.
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK.
Depending on the system layout, not all components may be
available.
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
The control box is properly mounted.
The minimum flow rate is guaranteed in all conditions.
See "To check the water volume and flow rate" in
"6.3 Preparing water piping" on page 26.
The option box is properly mounted.
To perform an air purge.
The backup heater is properly mounted.
To perform a test run.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to the available documentation and the applicable
legislation:
To perform an actuator test run.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
Underfloor screed dryout function
▪ Between the outdoor unit and the control box
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
▪ Between the control box and the option box
▪ Between the control box and the backup heater
▪ Between the local supply panel and the control box
9.4.1
1
Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration which space
heating loops can be closed due to mechanical, electronic, or
other valves.
▪ Between the control box and the room thermostat
2
▪ Between the control box and the domestic hot water
tank
Close all space heating loops that can be closed (see previous
step).
3
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To perform an
actuator test run" on page 78).
4
Go to [6.1.8]:
> Information > Sensor information > Flow rate
to check the flow rate. During pump test run operation, the unit
can operate below this minimum required flow rate that is
needed during defrost/backup heater operation.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the option box
▪ Between the outdoor unit and the valves
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have not been
bypassed.
Installer reference guide
76
To check the minimum flow rate
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
9 Commissioning
Bypass valve foreseen?
Yes
No
Modify the bypass valve setting
to reach the minimum required
flow rate + 2 l/min
In case the actual flow rate is
below the minimum flow rate
(required during defrost/backup
heater operation), modifications
at hydraulic configuration are
required. Increase the space
heating loops that can NOT be
closed or install a pressure
controlled bypass valve.
3
Select Manual and press
.
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
Result: The manual air purge starts and the following screen
appears.
Tue 01:18
Air purge
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Minimum required flow rate
05+07 models
9.4.2
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. When the air purge function is
running, the pump operates without actual operation of the unit and
the removal of air in the water circuit will start.
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
Scroll
5
Use the and buttons to scroll to Speed.
6
Use the
and
buttons to set the desired pump speed.
Result: Low
Result: High
7
If applicable, set the desired position of the 3-way valve (space
heating/domestic hot water). Use the and buttons to scroll to
Circuit.
8
Use the and buttons to set the desired position of the 3-way
valve (space heating/domestic hot water).
NOTICE
Result: SHC
Result: Tank
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manually: the unit will operate with a fixed pump speed and in a
fixed or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position
of the 3-way valve is a helpful feature to remove all air from the
water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. The operation speed of the pump (slow or quick)
can also be set.
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
the position of the 3-way valve between the space heating or the
domestic hot water heating mode.
Typical workflow
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1
2
Adjust
Stop
12 l/min
To perform an automatic air purge
Prerequisite: Make sure the user interface shows the home screens
and that the space heating and domestic hot water demands are
turned off.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 50.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Automatic and press
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
Performing a manual air purge
Performing an automatic air purge
> Installer settings >
.
Result: Air purging will start and the following screen will be
shown.
NOTICE
The outdoor unit is equipped with a manual air purge
valve. The air purge procedure requires manual action.
INFORMATION
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
Tue 01:18
Air purge
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Stop
Prerequisite: Make sure the user interface shows the home screens
and that the space heating and domestic hot water demands are
turned off.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 50.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
> Installer settings >
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Scroll
If the temperature of the water circuit is low, and glycol was
added to it, then the flow rate will NOT be displayed.
To interrupt air purge
1
To perform a manual air purge
Adjust
INFORMATION
Make sure the user interface shows the home screens and that the
space heating and domestic hot water demands are turned off.
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
Press
and press
purge function.
9.4.3
to confirm the interruption of the air
To perform a test run
Prerequisite: Make sure the user interface shows the home screens
and that the space heating and domestic hot water demands are
turned off.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 50.
Installer reference guide
77
9 Commissioning
2
Go to [A.7.1]:
run.
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Test
3
Select a test and press
4
Select OK and press
▪ Bivalent signal test
. Example: Heating.
.
▪ Quick heat-up test
▪ Circulation pump test
INFORMATION
When starting up the system in a cold climate, and NO
backup heater kit (EKMBUHCA3V3 or EKMBUHCA9W1)
was installed, it may be required to start up with a small
water volume. To do this, gradually open the heat emitters.
As a result, the water temperature will gradually rise.
Monitor the inlet water temperature ([6.1.6] in the menu
structure) and make sure it does NOT drop below 15°C.
9.4.5
INFORMATION
If a backup heater kit is part of the system, this function can be
executed without finishing the outdoor installation. In this case, the
backup heater will perform the screed dryout and supply the leaving
water without heat pump operation.
If 2 user interfaces are present, you can start a test run
from both user interfaces.
▪ The user interface used to start the test run displays a
status screen.
▪ The other user interface displays a "busy" screen. You
cannot use the user interface as long as the "busy"
screen is shown.
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
the test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperature, go to [A.6] and select the information
you want to check.
To perform an actuator test run
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select pump operation, a test run
of the pump will start).
Prerequisite: Make sure the user interface shows the home screens
and that the space heating and domestic hot water demands are
turned off.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 50.
2
Make sure the room temperature control, the leaving water
temperature control and the domestic hot water control are
turned OFF via the user interface.
3
Go to [A.7.4]:
Actuator test run.
4
Select an actuator and press
5
Select OK and press
> Installer settings > Commissioning >
. Example: Pump.
.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It automatically stops when
finished. To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Booster heater test
▪ Backup heater (step 1) test
▪ Backup heater (step 2) test
▪ Pump test
Underfloor heating screed dryout
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Make sure the user interface shows the home screens and that the
space heating and domestic hot water demands are turned off.
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.5.1.2]=0), and the
unit is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
NOTICE
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 12 hours after
the first power-on.
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 12 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
NOTICE
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
▪ [4‑00] = 1
▪ [C‑02] = 0
INFORMATION
▪ [D‑01] = 0
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
▪ [4‑08] = 0
▪ 2-way valve test
Installer reference guide
78
▪ Alarm output test
▪ Cooling/heating signal test
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically when done
(±30 min). To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
9.4.4
▪ 3-way valve test
▪ [4‑01] ≠ 1
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
10 Hand-over to the user
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
Tue 15:10
Screed dryout
T
24h (1)
1
14d 12h
25°C
Current step
Remaining
Desired LWT
Example:
36h (2)
Stop
25°C (1)
A1
To readout the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
35°C (2)
t
T
t
(1)
(2)
Press
2
The current step of the program, the total remaining time, and
the current desired leaving water temperature will be displayed.
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
Duration (1~72 h)
Action step 1
Action step 2
INFORMATION
There is limited access to the menu structure. Only the
following menus can be accessed:
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 50.
2
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout > Set dryout schedule.
3
Use the
,
,
, and
to program the schedule.
and
to scroll through the schedule.
▪ Use
and
to adjust the selection.
▪ Use
If a time is selected, you can set the duration between 1 and
72 hours.
If a temperature is selected, you can set the desired leaving
water temperature between 15°C and 55°C.
4
To add a new step, select "–h" or "–" on an empty line and
.
press
5
To delete a step, set the duration to "–" by pressing
6
Press
.
1
.
▪ Information.
▪ Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH screed
dryout.
To interrupt an underfloor heating screed dryout
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 84. To reset the U3 error, your User
permission level needs to be Installer.
1
Go to the underfloor heating screed dryout screen.
2
Press
.
3
Press
to interrupt the program.
4
Select OK and press
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout program is stopped.
to save the schedule.
It is important that there is no empty step in the program.
The schedule will stop when a blank step is programmed
OR when 20 consecutive steps have been executed.
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switchoff, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status.
5
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout > Dryout status > Stopped at and followed by the
last executed step.
6
Modify and restart the execution of the program.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
INFORMATION
Preferential kWh rate power supply cannot be used in
combination with underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure there is ONLY 1 user interface connected
to your system to perform an underfloor heating screed dryout.
10
Prerequisite: Make sure the user interface shows the home screens
and that the space heating and domestic hot water demands are
turned off.
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
1
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout.
2
Set a dryout program.
3
Select Start dryout and press
4
Select OK and press
.
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts and following
screen will be shown. It stops automatically when done. To stop it
manually, press
, select OK and press
.
Hand-over to the user
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
79
11 Maintenance and service
10.1
11.2
About locking and unlocking
If required, it is possible to lock the buttons of the main user
interface, making it impossible for the user to operate it. For the user
to be able to change setpoint temperatures, the simplified user
interface or an external room thermostat is then required.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
You can use the following locking modes:
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
▪ Function lock: Locks a specific function to prevent people from
changing its settings.
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
▪ Button lock: Locks all buttons to prevent users from changing
settings.
11.2.1
Possible function locks
Lock
Maintenance safety precautions
If active, people cannot…
Room On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the room
temperature control.
LWT On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the leaving
water temperature (main +
additional) control.
Opening the outdoor unit
See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit" on page 32 and "7.2.3 To open
the switch box cover of the outdoor unit" on page 32.
11.2.2
Opening the control box
See "7.2.4 To open the control box" on page 32.
Tank On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the domestic
hot water control.
11.2.3
Temperature up/down
Adjust temperatures.
See "7.2.5 To open the option box" on page 32.
Quiet mode
Use quiet mode.
Holiday
Use holiday mode.
Operation mode
Set the space operation mode.
User settings
Change settings in [7]:
settings.
11.2.4
> User
To check if locking is active
1
Press
2
If
to go to one of the home pages.
is displayed, button lock is active.
Note: If you are on a home page and try to use a function that is
locked, is displayed for 1 second.
To activate or deactivate a function lock
Opening the option box
Opening the backup heater
See "7.2.6 To open the backup heater" on page 33 and "7.2.7 To
open the switch box cover of the backup heater" on page 33.
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Heat exchanger
▪ Water pressure
▪ Water filter
1
Press
to go to the menu structure.
▪ Water pressure relief valve
2
Press
for more than 5 seconds.
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
3
Select a function and press
4
Select Lock or Unlock, and press
▪ Switch box
.
.
To activate or deactivate button lock
1
Press
to go to one of the home pages.
2
Press
for more than 5 seconds.
11
Maintenance and service
▪ Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
Water pressure
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
NOTICE
Maintenance should preferably be carried out yearly by an
installer or service agent.
Water filter
Clean the water filter.
NOTICE
11.1
Overview: Maintenance and
service
Handle the water filter with care. Do NOT use excessive
force when you reinsert the water filter so as NOT to
damage the water filter mesh.
This chapter contains information about:
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The inspection of the backup heater switch box.
▪ The inspection of the control box switch box.
Installer reference guide
80
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
12 Troubleshooting
2
1
3
It is recommended to remove lime buildup on the booster heater to
extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water. To do so,
drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the booster heater from
the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a bucket (or similar) with
lime-removing product for 24 hours.
4
5
12
Troubleshooting
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
Water pressure relief valve
It contains information about:
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
12.2
Precautions when troubleshooting
WARNING
▪ flush the system and install an additional water filter (a
magnetic cyclone filter is preferable).
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, always make sure that the unit is disconnected
from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit breaker.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
WARNING
Prevent hazard due to the inadvertent resetting of the
thermal cut-out: this appliance must NOT be supplied
through an external switching device, such as a timer, or
connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF
by the utility.
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Switch box
12.3
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
If applicable, also inspect the switch box of the control box, option
box, and backup heater.
Solving problems based on
symptoms
12.3.1
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or
cooling as expected
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, and K5M in
the switch box of the backup heater, and K3M in the switch box of
the control box (depending on your installation) operate correctly.
All contacts of these contactors must be in open position when the
power is turned OFF.
Possible causes
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Corrective action
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
INFORMATION
Only if a domestic hot water tank with a built-in electrical
booster heater (EKHW) is part of the system.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
81
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
The water flow is too low
Corrective action
12.3.2
Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 77) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 77).
The water volume in the
installation is too low
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Possible causes
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low)
Corrective action
If the system contains a
backup heater:
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump
(see
"14.9 ESP
curve" on page 113).
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
It may be required to start up with
a small water volume. To do this,
gradually open the heat emitters.
As a result, the water
temperature will gradually rise.
Monitor the inlet water
temperature ([6.1.6] in the menu
structure) and make sure it does
NOT drop below 15°C.
If the system does NOT
contain a backup heater:
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.3.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 28).
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
The preferential kWh rate power This should match with the
supply settings and electrical
connections as explained in
connections do NOT match
"6.4 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 29 and "7.8.6 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 41.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
12.3.3
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
Possible causes
Corrective action
There is air in the system
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 77) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 77).
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The manometer is not broken.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.3.4 Changing the prepressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 28).
Installer reference guide
82
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
12 Troubleshooting
12.3.4
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Possible causes
Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken
Replace the expansion vessel.
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.3.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 28 and
"6.3.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 28).
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
outdoor unit and the highest
point of the water circuit. If the
outdoor unit is located at the
highest point of the installation,
the installation height is
considered 0 m. The maximum
water circuit head is 10 m.
Possible causes
If the system contains a backup
heater: the backup heater
equilibrium temperature has not
been configured correctly
▪ [A.5.1.4] > Installer settings >
Heat sources > Backup heater
> Equilibrium temp. OR
▪ [A.8] > Installer settings >
Overview settings [5‑01]
If the system contains a backup
heater: the overcurrent fuse has
operated
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
Corrective action
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
There is air in the system
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 77) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 77).
Too much heat pump capacity is
used for heating domestic hot
water (applies only to
installations with a domestic hot
water tank)
Check and make sure that the
“space heating priority” settings
have been configured
appropriately:
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
If the system contains a backup
heater: backup heater operation
is not activated
12.3.7
Corrective action
Check and make sure that:
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ [A.5.1.1] > Installer settings
> Heat sources > Backup
heater > Operation mode
[4‑00]
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check:
▪ The air purge operation
Press the reset button in the
switch box. See
"14.4 Components" on page 93
for the location of the reset
button.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusual high
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief ▪ Flush and clean the complete
valve.
tank including the piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
12.3.8
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes
▪ The water pressure
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑02]
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑03]
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
12.3.6
Check the fuse and switch it back
on
If the system contains a backup Check the thermal protector and
heater: the thermal protector has reset it by pushing the button
operated
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
Corrective action
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief Contact your local dealer.
valve.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Possible causes
Corrective action
The disinfection function was
Program the start-up of the
interrupted by domestic hot water disinfection function when the
tapping
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
Installer reference guide
83
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Reheat or Reheat +
sched. is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Scheduled only is
selected, it is recommended to
program a Storage eco 3 hours
before the scheduled start-up of
the disinfection function to
preheat the tank.
The disinfection operation was
stopped manually: with the user
interface displaying the DHW
home page and its user
permission level set to Installer,
the
button was pressed
during disinfection operation.
Do NOT press the
button
while the disinfection function is
active.
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
E5
00
OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E6
00
OU: Compressor startup defect.
Please contact your dealer.
E7
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
unit fan motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E8
00
OU: Power input overvoltage.
Please contact your dealer.
EA
00
OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H0
00
OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
12.3.10 Symptom: The energy metering
(produced heat) is NOT working correctly
Possible causes
The measured temperatures for
produced heat calculation are
NOT accurate.
H3
00
pressure switch (HPS)
Please contact your dealer.
Corrective action
Execute a calibration of the
system by performing an actuator
test run of the pump (see
"9.4.4 To perform an actuator
test run" on page 78).
OU: Malfunction of high
H6
00
OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
H8
00
OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system.
12.4
Solving problems based on error
codes
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
countermeasure before resetting the error code. This should be
done by a licensed installer or by your local dealer.
Please contact your dealer.
H9
00
air thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
F3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature.
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
Please contact your dealer.
F6
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure
in cooling.
Please contact your dealer.
12.4.1
Error codes: Overview
FA
00
actuation of HPS.
Error codes of the outdoor unit
Please contact your dealer.
Refrigerant part
JA
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A5
00
OU: High pressure cooling/Peak
cut/ freeze protection problem.
00
00
Please contact your dealer.
J3
00
Please contact your dealer.
E3
00
OU: Actuation of high pressure
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
OU: PCB defect.
Power reset required.
OU: Malfunction of high
pressure sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
E1
OU: Abnormal high pressure,
J6
00
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
switch (HPS).
Please contact your dealer.
Installer reference guide
84
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
12 Troubleshooting
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
L3
00
OU: Electrical box temperature
7H
06
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost.
rise problem.
Manual reset.
Please contact your dealer.
L4
00
Check the plate heat exchanger.
OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature rise.
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen.
8H
00
Abnormal increase outlet
Please contact your dealer.
L5
00
OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC).
water temperature.
Please contact your dealer.
P4
00
OU: Malfunction of radiating
fin temperature sensor.
8F
00
water temperature (DHW).
Please contact your dealer.
U0
00
Abnormal increase outlet
OU: Shortage of refrigerant.
Please contact your dealer.
C0
00
C0
01
C0
02
U3
00
Flow sensor malfunction.
Manual reset.
U2
00
OU: Defect of power supply
Auto reset.
voltage.
Please contact your dealer.
U7
00
00
correctly.
OU: Indoor/outdoor combination
problem.
Under floor heating screed
dryout function not completed
Please contact your dealer.
UA
Flow switch malfunction.
Manual reset.
OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU.
Flow switch malfunction.
81
00
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
Hydro part
C4
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem.
00
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
80
00
Power reset required.
01
EEPROM reading error.
Returning water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
A1
Heat exchanger temperature
Please contact your dealer.
U5
00
User interface
communication problem.
AA
01
Backup heater overheated.
U4
00
Hydro part / refrigerant part
communication problem
AC
00
Booster heater overheated.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
UA
00
7H
01
Hydro part / refrigerant part
matching problem.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
EC
00
Water flow problem.
Abnormal increase tank
temperature.
Auto restart.
7H
7H
04
05
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production.
HC
00
Tank temperature sensor
Manual reset.
problem.
Check the domestic hot water
circuit.
Please contact your dealer.
CJ
02
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling.
Manual reset.
Check the space heating/cooling
circuit.
Room temperature sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H1
00
External temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
85
13 Disposal
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen.
7H
06
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during cooling/defrost
operation. Check the space
heating/cooling circuit.
A1
00
EEPROM reading error.
AH
00
Tank disinfection function not
Additionally, this error code might
be an indication of frost damage
to the plate heat exchanger. In
that case, contact your local
dealer.
completed correctly.
89
03
INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
Heat exchanger frozen.
INFORMATION
AJ
03
If the unit detects flow when the pump is not running, an
external device might be causing flow, or there might be
something wrong with the flow measuring devices (flow
sensor and flow switch).
Too long DHW heat-up time
required.
UA
16
Communication problem between
hydro part and control box.
UA
22
Communication problem between
control box and option box.
▪ If the flow sensor detects flow when the pump is not
running, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display error C0‑00. For the unit to resume
operation, this error needs to be reset manually.
▪ If the flow switch detects flow when the pump is not
running, the unit will temporarily stop operation and the
user interface will display error C0‑01. After some time,
the error will reset automatically and the unit will
resume operation. If the problem persists, the unit will
stop operation and the user interface will display error
C0‑02. For the unit to resume operation, this error
needs to be reset manually.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
NOTICE
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
13
Disposal
13.1
Overview: Disposal
Typical workflow
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
1
Pumping down the system.
2
3
Dismantling the system according to the applicable legislation.
Treating the refrigerant, oil and other parts according to the
applicable legislation.
INFORMATION
Minimum required flow
05+07 models
If the 7H‑01 error persists, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display an error code that needs to be reset manually.
Depending on the problem, this error code is different:
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
04
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during domestic hot
water operation. Check the
domestic hot water circuit.
7H
For more details, see the service manual.
12 l/min
05
13.2
To pump down
Example: To protect the environment, pump down when disposing
of the unit.
It is NOT required to pump down when relocating the unit.
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during space heating
operation. Check the space
heating circuit.
NOTICE
During pump down operation, stop the compressor before
removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still
running and the stop valve is open during pump down, air
will be sucked into the system. Compressor breakage and
other injury will be the result due to abnormal pressure in
the refrigerant cycle.
Pump down operation will extract all refrigerant from the system into
the outdoor unit.
Installer reference guide
86
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
13 Disposal
1
Remove the valve lid from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
2
Carry out the forced cooling operation.
3
After 5 to 10 minutes (after only 1 or 2 minutes in case of very
low ambient temperatures (<−10°C)), close the liquid stop valve
with a hexagonal wrench.
4
Check with the manifold if the vacuum is reached.
5
After 2-3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced
cooling operation.
b
c
a
d
e
d
a
b
c
d
e
13.3
Gas stop valve
Closing direction
Hexagonal wrench
Valve lid
Liquid stop valve
To start and stop forced cooling
Confirm that DIP switch SW2 is in COOL mode.
2
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to stop forced
cooling.
SW2
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to begin forced
cooling.
SW3
SW1
1
COOL
HEAT
NOTICE
Take care that while running forced cooling operation, the
water temperature remains higher than 5°C (see
temperature read out of the indoor unit). You can achieve
this, for example, by activating all fans of the fan coil units.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
87
14 Technical data
14
Technical data
14.1
Overview: Technical data
This chapter contains information about:
• Dimensions and service space
• Centre of gravity
• Components
• Piping diagram
• Wiring diagram
• Technical specifications
• Operation range
• ESP curve
14.2
Dimensions and service space
14.2.1
Dimensions and service space: Outdoor
unit
Dimensions: Outdoor unit
56 75
735
356
304
1089
Installer reference guide
88
30
214
44 75
180
330
283
740
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
250(A) / 400(B)
250
350
250(A) / 400(B)
250
Service space: Outdoor unit
250
14.2.2
300
350
350
250
Dimensions and service space: Options
Dimensions and service space: control box and option box
.5
6.2
R2
A
305
360
A
R4
.5
22
2.5
5
B
318
B
340
50
97
55
50
340
100
600
50
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
50
Installer reference guide
89
14 Technical data
Dimensions: backup heater
20
140
26.5 x 6.5
50
57
150
250
210
7
393
548
535
560
Ø6
.5
76
Ø6
125
>200
Service space: backup heater
>50
>500
>350
>50
Installer reference guide
90
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
Center of gravity
14.3.1
Center of gravity: Outdoor unit
Y
14.3
Z
X
Model
EBLQ05CAV3
X
Y
Z
399 mm
329 mm
158 mm
372 mm
340 mm
153 mm
EDLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
EDLQ07CAV3
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
91
14 Technical data
14.3.2
Center of gravity: Options
164
Center of gravity: control box and option box
55
177
B
Center of gravity: backup heater
C
A
A
B
C
EKMBUHCA3V3
Model
132 mm
272 mm
103 mm
EKMBUHCA9W1
138 mm
273 mm
99 mm
Installer reference guide
92
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.4
Components
14.4.1
Components: Outdoor unit
b
a
c d e
p
i
m
l
j
n
n
n
f
g
o o
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
h
k
Water IN connection 1" M
Water OUT connection 1" M
Wiring intake (power supply)
Wiring intake (high voltage wiring)
Wiring intake (low voltage wiring)
Pump
Water filter
Safety valve
Switch box
Flow sensor
Flow switch
Expansion vessel
Air purge valve
Drain outlet
Shut‑off valve with drain/fill valve 1" (included accessory)
4 holes for anchor bolts
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
93
14 Technical data
14.4.2
Components: Switch box (outdoor unit)
TB1
X7M
a
c
b
h
b
X6Y X6YA
X6YB
FU1
g
A1P
i
d
A2P
f
X5M
X4M
e
X3M
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Transformer
Connectors
Terminal block (to heaters)
Terminal block (low voltage)
Terminal block (high voltage)
Terminal block (power supply)
Main PCB
Main PCB fuse
Current loop PCB for communication with control box and
option box
Installer reference guide
94
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.4.3
Components: Options
Components: control box and option box
a
a
b
a
b
Terminal strip
Terminal block (power)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
95
14 Technical data
Components: backup heater
c
d
b
a
h
e
e
e
f
e
f
g
g
EKMBUHCA3V
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Water IN connection 1" M
Water OUT connection 1" M
Air purge
Backup heater
Backup heater contactor
Backup heater thermal fuse
Backup heater overcurrent fuse
Terminal block
Installer reference guide
96
EKMBUHCA9W
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.4.4
d
Components: Switch box (options)
e
f
g
Control box
X2M
Option box
A4P
a
Terminal block (only for installations with a domestic hot
water tank)
Terminal block (power supply)
Terminal block (low voltage)
Terminal block (high voltage)
X2M
f
K3M
A4P
b
c
a
K1A
K1A
K2A
F2B
c
K2A
X1M
X4M
g
X1M
X8M
d
e
d
b
a
b
c
Extension PCB
Booster heater contactor (only for installations with a
domestic hot water tank)
Booster heater circuit breaker (only for installations with a
domestic hot water tank)
X8M
a
b
c
d
Extension PCB
Terminal block (power supply)
Terminal block (low voltage)
Terminal block (high voltage)
Backup heater
X14M
b
K2M
K1M
c
a
c
K5M
Q1L
c
F1B
d
X15M
e
a
b
c
d
e
Thermal protector
Terminal (only for EKMBUHCA9W1)
Contactor
Circuit breaker
Terminal block
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
97
14 Technical data
Piping diagram
14.5.1
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
Flow switch
R1T
Pump
Flow sensor
Air purge
Plate heat exchanger
12.7 CuT
Pressure sensor
t>
·15.9· CuT
p
Outlet
12.7 CuT
12.7 CuT
12.7 CuT
Gas stop valve
with service port
4-way valve
High pressure switch p >
Expansion vessel
Shut-off valve with drain/fill valve
12.7 CuT
Refrigerant flow
7.9 CuT 7.9 CuT
14.5
t>
Filter
Shut-off valve with
drain/fill valve
R1T Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
R3T Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
R4T Inlet water thermistor
Blow-off
Heating
R3T
t>
9.5 CuT
Muffler
Muffler
7.9 CuT
Discharge pipe thermistor
Liquid stop
valveV
6.4 CuT
Accumulator
Compressor
Muffler with filter
6.4 CuT
R4T
Inlet
7.9 CuT
Cooling
Safety valve
Filter
Outdoor air temperature thermistor
Motor-operated valve
Filter
6.4 CuT
Heat exchanger
Capillary tube 1
Muffler with filter
6.4 CuT
4.0 CuT 7.9 CuT
4.0 CuT 7.9 CuT
Capillary tube 2
Capillary tube 3
4.0 CuT
4.0 CuT
Capillary tube 4
Heat exchanger thermistor
M
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
12.7 CuT
Propeller fan
3D097222-1
Installer reference guide
98
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.6
Wiring diagram
14.6.1
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the outdoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Position in option box
Position in switch box (hydro switch box)
PCB3
X7M
TR1
A4P
X2M
X6Y
X1M
A1P
X8M
Position in backup heater kit
A2P
X14M
X3
M
X5M
X4M
K2M
Position in compressor switch box
K1M
Q1L
K1R
K5M
PCB1
K2R
X1M
X2M
F1B
X15M
PCB2
K3M
Position in control box
X2M
A4P
F2B
X4M
X1M
X8M
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
99
14 Technical data
User installed options:
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Remote user interface
External thermistor
External outdoor thermistor
Heat pump convector
Control box
Additional leaving water temperature:
Domestic hot water tank
Backup heater option
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
Backup heater configuration (only for *9W)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
External thermistor
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
Heat pump convector
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
Option box
9WN (3N~, 400 V, 9 kW)
External indoor ambient thermistor
Main leaving water temperature:
Outdoor unit: compressor module (EDLQ05CAV3+EBLQ05CAV3)
hydro switch box
A
X19A/5
X19A/3
X19A/1
1
2
3
S502
ON
OFF
SW1 SW3
GRN RED RED RED RED
X4M/PE
X4M/N
X4M/L
PCB3
SW2
4
ON
OFF
1
SW5
1 2 3 4 5
S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5
S503
S501
1 2 3 4 5
PCB2
IPM1
DB1
HL402
+ C110
HN402
MR30_A
FU1
MR307
2 MR30_B
1
1 2 3 4 5
S50 S20
S60
1 2 3 4
V401
T3,15A
DB401
MR306
DP2
DP1
1 2 3 4 5 6
S90
S40
1 2 3 4
DCP2
DCM2
S211
1
2
3
4
S411
1
2
3
4
S202
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LED B
FU2
T3,15A
MR4
S80
1 2 3
S70
U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V W
BLU
1
2
3
DC P2
W
HN2
WHT
YLW
ORG
BLU
RED
1
MR30
DC N2
V
BLU
4
BRN
BRN
BLK
BLK
V3
S10
DC P1
RED
X12A
MRM10
30A
DC N1
YLW
GRN/YLW
V2
U
HL2
DCP1 PPL
DCM1 BRN
MRM20
HL1 FU3
BLU HN1
RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RED
BRN
1
2
3
S209
1 2 3 4 5
SA1
WHT
BLK
X2M Z3C
E1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
S206
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
Z1C
L
N
S210
YLW
X1M
GRN
PCB1
CK1
E2
YLW
Z2C
GRN
+ C112
+ C111
DB2
YLW
sheet
metal
Z4C
compressor switch box
M
S1NPH
-t°
R3T
-t°
R2T
-t°
R1T
S1PH
P>
1
2
Q1L
RED
Y1E
X11A
Y1R
M1F MS
M1C MS
3~
4D094176-1B_Page 5
Installer reference guide
100
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
Outdoor unit: compressor module (EDLQ07CAV3+EBLQ07CAV3)
hydro switch box
A
X19A/5
X19A/3
X19A/1
1
2
3
S502
ON
OFF
SW1 SW3
GRN RED RED RED RED
X4M/PE
X4M/N
X4M/L
PCB3
SW2
4
ON
OFF
1
SW5
1 2 3 4 5
S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
S503
1 2 3 4 5
S501
1 2 3 4 5
PCB2
IPM1
DB1
HL402
+ C110
HN402
X12A
4
MRM10
V3
S211
1
2
3
4
MR30
S10
2
1
DC N2
DC P2
V
W
HN2
MR30_A
FU1
MR307
MR30_B
1 2 3 4 5
S50 S20
S60
1 2 3 4
DP2
S202
V401
T3,15A
MR306
1 2 3 4 5 6
DP1
DB401
S90
S40
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 7
S411
1
2
3
4
LED B
FU2
T3,15A
S401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MR4
S80
WHT
YLW
ORG
BLU
RED
1
BRN
BRN
BLK
BLK
DC P1
1 2 3
S70
U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V W
BLU
GRN/YLW
V2
30A
1
2
3
DC N1
BLU
RED
HL1 FU3
HN1
U
HL2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RED
BLU
1 2 3 4 5
YLW
BLK
BRN
1
2
3
S209
MRM20
SA1
WHT
X2M Z3C
E1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
S206
YLW
Z1C
L
N
S210
RED
GRN
PCB1
E2
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
X1M
GRN
YLW
Z2C
+ C112
+ C111
YLW
sheet
metal
DB2
Z4C
M
S1NPH
compressor switch box
-t°
R3T
-t°
R2T
-t°
R1T
S1PH
P>
1
2
Q1L
RED
Y1E
X11A
Y1R
M1F MS
M1C MS
3~
4D094176-1B_Page 6
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
101
14 Technical data
Outdoor unit: hydro module
Only for normal power supply (standard)
Hydro switch box supplied from compressor
module
Only for preferential kWh rate power supply
(compressor)
Use normal kWh rate power supply for
hydro switch box
Compressor switch box
L N 1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
Normal kWh rate
power supply
X4M L N
X3M
5 6
X3M
X4M L N
Q4DI
Q3DI
X1M/L
X1M/N
X1M/PE
X2M/1
X2M/2
X2M/3
X2M/1
X2M/2
X2M/3
X1M/L
X1M/N
X1M/PE
Compressor switch box
Q3DI
X1A
X6YB
X3M 5 6
L N
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
Normal kWh rate
power supply
X6YA
X6Y
1
X6YA
X19A
3 1
1
2
X5M
5
6
K6R
X14A
3 1
X10A
1 2
3
4 5
X18A
K4R
2 1
X21A
X5A
R1T
X7A
R3T
X8A
R4T
1
2
KVR
KCR
X2A
1 3 5
X20A
1 3 5
FU2
X28A
1 2
X16A
-t°
1
2
5 3
1
X25A
1 2
X31A
1 3
X26A
1 2
X45A
3~
PE
L
N
GND
PWM
MS
M1P
-t°
1 3
Hydro switch box
TR1
E6H
-t°
1
2
X7M 1 2 3 4
102
X8M/10
1
2
X4A
Installer reference guide
3 1
K5R
E7H
X2M/22
X2M/23
X2M/21
X2M/20
Control box
X15A
1 3 5
external outdoor
ambient sensor option
E
4
3
2
1
X8M/9
X8M/8
X8M/7
X8M/6
A1P
1
2
B1L
X5M
X5Y
X22A
1
2
3
4
1
2
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
Preferential
power supply
FU1
R6T -t°
X10A
L N
X6YB
X6Y
1
X1A
A2P
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
S1L
4D094176-1B_Page 7
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
Control box
Heatpump convector
X3M/1
X3M/2
X3M/3
X3M/4
X5Y
X5M/4
X5M/3
X5M/2
X5M/1
P1P2
P1P2
X2M
L
N
PE
1
1
X4M 1
X6M 1
3
4
A2
3
A1
5
X10A
5
4
3
2
1
F1U
X2A
5
4
3
2
1
K3M
+12V
ON
OFF
5
C
COM
H
A7P
5
R5T / X2M.4
R5T / X2M.3
X2M
5
6
Option box
A4P/X5A.1
A4P/X5A.2
A4P/X5A.3
1
2
3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 43 2 1
X2M
X14A
GND
X4A
X15M : 5
X15M : 6
X15M : 7
13
14
15
1
2
3
F2U
1
2
3
X15M : 1
X15M : 2
A4P
X5A
1 2 3 4 5 6
X2M
X15M : 3
X15M : 4
BUH option
11
12
X2M 7 8 9 10
Control box
X9M 1
2
Q2L
Q2L/Q3L 2/4
E4H
11
12
2
X6M 1
21
Q2L
22
E4H
domestic
hot water tank
1
2
2
X9M 1
3
Q2L
4
E4H
domestic
hot water tank
31
X9M 13 14
2
Only for enamel
tank option
32
E4H
domestic
hot water tank
7
only for *KHWS*V3
X2M.1
X2M.1
X2M.2
X8M.6
X8M.7
X3A
DS1
2
1/3
A3P
3
X8M
I
L N
H
4
F1U
4
1
2
COM
3
4
5
X1A 2 1
I
5
1
K1A
Q6DI
F2B
C
2a 1a 2 1 4 3 X2M
K2A
2
-t°
L
X8M 10 9 8 7 6
X2M 23 22
(refer to installation
manual)
N
7
only for *KHWS*Z2
Y
R5T
M3S
S1S
Preferential kWh
rate power supply
contact:
5V DC detection
(voltage supplied
by PCB)
- t°
3/21/31
Q2L
4/22/32
L
domestic
hot water tank
7
only for*KHWE*Z2
R5T/ X2M.3
R5T / X2M.4
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
R1T
M4S
N
Y
X1M L N
20
21
-t°
A3P Dual setpoint application
X2M.2
X2M.1a
-t°
R2T
R1H
X1M
-t°
X2M.1a
X2M.2
X2M.1
R1T
-t°
%H20
R1T
PC
M
1~
X1M/L
X1M/N
X1M/PE
A3P
only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
DHW pump
M2P
Option box
Q5DI
5
X8M.5
X8M.4
A5P
User interface
R1T
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
L N
M2S
X2M.1a
X2M.2
X2M.1
Remote
user interface
3 4 5 6 X11M
NO valve
DHW pump output
Max. load:
2 A (inrush) - 230 V AC
1 A (continuous)
X2M.1a
X2M.2
X2M.1
A5P
only for ext. sensor
(floor or ambient)
X8M.6
X8M.7
X8M.5
X8M.4
Hydro switch box
only for wireless On/OFF thermostat
7
only for*KHWE*V3
DHW option
4D094176-1B_Page 8
Control box option: backup heater
X2M : 5
X2M : 6
X15M
1
2
X2M : 12
X2M : 11
X2M : 13
X2M : 14
X2M : 15
X15M
3
4
5
6
7
Control box
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
R2T
- t°
X15M
1
2
N
L
Q1DI
2
F1B
5
1
I
L1 L2 L3
- t°
X15M
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
31
Q1L
32
A1
31
K1M A2
F1T
L
21
K2R 1
12
22
5
K5M
4
3
F1B
12
A1
3
4
A2
K1M
A1
3
4
A2
A1
K2M
A2
I
1
6
4
2
Q1L
E3H
I
3
I
8
I
5
7
14
13
2
1
4
3
6
5
2
1
4
3
6
5
2
1
4
3
6
5
2
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
2
BUH option (*9W)
I
6
4
2
F1B
I
1
3
I
5
K5M
2
1
4
3
6
5
K1M
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
I
7
14
13
F1T
F1T
F1T
F2T
F2T
F2T
F1T
F1T
F1T
2
1
F2T
4
3
F2T
6
5
F2T
E1H
E1H
E1H
E2H
E2H
E2H
E1H
E1H
E1H
E2H
E2H
E2H
K2M
X14M 1 2 3 4 5 6
BUH option (only for *3V)
PE
N
Q1DI
11
K1R 1
11
2
1
PE
Q1DI
32
3
N
F1U
5
F1U
K1R 1
I
4
R2T
3
3N ~ 400 V 6 kW or 9 kW
X14M
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
1N~ , 230 V , 3 kW or 6 kW
4D094176-1B_Page 9
Installer reference guide
103
14 Technical data
Control box option: option box
A4P/X5A.1
A4P/X5A.2
A4P/X5A.3
X1M/L
X1M/N
X1M/PE
Control box
Option box
X1M
L
A4P
N
X5A
1
2
3
ON
OFF
DS1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
X1A
F1U
5
4
3
2
1
X2A
+12V
F2U
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X3A
X4A
1
2
3
4
5
6
X14A
1 2
3
X8M 1 2 3 4 5
X2M 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2M 5 6 3 4 1 2 1a 2a
Alarm output
Max. load 150mA - 12 V DC
Space C/H ON/OFF output
Max. voltage 250V AC
Max. load 3A
Min. load 10mA
Ext. heat source
Max. voltage 250V AC
Max. load 3A
Min. load 10mA
1 2
S1P
S2P
S3P
Power limitation digital inputs:
5 V DC detection
(voltage supplied by PCB)
R6T
-t°
external indoor ambient
sensor option
S5P
S6P
S4P
Electric pulse meter inputs:
5 V DC pulse detection
(voltage supplied by PCB)
Power limitation
digital input :
5 V DC detection
(voltage supplied by PCB)
4D094176-1B_Page 10
A1P
Main PCB
K1R
*
Backup heater relay (step 1)
A2P
Current loop PCB
K2R
*
Backup heater relay (step 2)
On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
K1M
*
Contactor backup heater (step 1)
A3P
*
A3P
*
Heat pump convector
K2M
*
Contactor backup heater (step 2)
A4P
*
Extension PCB (control, optional)
K3M
*
Contactor booster heater
User interface PCB
K5M
*
Safety contactor backup heater (only for
*9W)
A5P
A7P
*
Receiver PCB (wireless On/OFF thermostat)
DS1 (A4P)
*
DIP switch
K*R
Relay on PCB
B1L
Flow sensor
M1P
Main supply pump
E1H
Backup heater element (1 kW)
M2P
#
Domestic hot water pump
E2H
Backup heater element (2 kW)
M2S
#
Shut‑off valve
E3H
Backup heater element
M3S
E4H
Booster heater (3 kW)
M4S
*
Valve kit
E6H
Plate heat exchanger heater tape
Q*DI
#
Earth leakage circuit breaker
E7H
Expansion vessel heater
Q1L
*
Thermal protector backup heater
Overcurrent fuse backup heater
Q2L
*
Thermal protector booster heater
Overcurrent fuse booster heater
R1T (A1P)
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
Thermal fuse backup heater
R1T (A5P)
Ambient sensor user interface
F1B
F2B
F1T, F2T
*
*
*
3-way valve for domestic hot water
Fuse T 2 A 250 V
R1T (A3P)
*
Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
F2U (A4P)
Fuse T 2 A 250 V for 3‑way valve
R2T
*
Outlet backup heater thermistor
FU1 (A1P)
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V
R2T (A3P)
*
External sensor (floor or ambient)
FU2 (A1P)
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V
R3T (A1P)
F1U (A4P)
Installer reference guide
104
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
R4T (A1P)
Inlet water thermistor
DB1, DB2, DB401
Rectifier bridge
R5T
*
Domestic hot water thermistor
Y1R
Reversing solenoid valve coil
R6T (A1P)
*
External outdoor ambient thermistor
SHEET METAL
Terminal strip fixed plate
R6T (A4P)
*
External indoor ambient thermistor
*
Humidity sensor
MRM*, MR30,
MR4, MR306,
MR307
Magnetic relay
R1H (A3P)
MR30_A, DP1,
E1, MR30_B,
DP2, E2, DC_P1,
DC_P2, DCP1,
DC_N1, DC_N2,
HN402, HL402,
DCP2, DCM1,
DCM2
Connector
S1L
Flow switch
S1S
#
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
S1P~S4P
#
Digital power limitation inputs
S5P~S6P
#
Electrical meters
TR1
Power supply transformer
X*M
Terminal strip
X*Y
Connector
PCB1
Main PCB
PCB2
Inverter PCB
*=
Optional
PCB3
Service PCB
#=
Field supply
M1C
Compressor motor
BLK
Black
Fan motor
BLU
Blue
FU2 (PCB2)
Fuse
BRN
Brown
Z1C~Z4C
Ferrite core
GRN
Green
Electronic expansion valve coil
GRY
Grey
V2, V3, V401
Varistor
ORG
Orange
SA1
Surge arrestor
PPL
Purple
Fuse
RED
Red
S1NPH
Pressure sensor
WHT
White
S1PH
Pressure switch (high)
YLW
Yellow
R1T (PCB1)
Thermistor (discharge)
Notes to go through before starting the unit
R2T (PCB1)
Thermistor (heat exchange)
R3T (PCB1)
Thermistor (air)
S2~S503
Connector
LED A, LED B
Pilot lamp
IPM1
Intelligent power module
SW1, SW3
Push buttons
SW2, SW5
DIP switches
C110~C112
Capacitor
LED 1~LED 4
Indication lamp
M1F
Y1E
FU1, FU3 (PCB1)
Q1L (PCB1)
English
X4M
Translation
Main terminal
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
Not mounted in switch box
Wiring depending on model
PCB
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
105
14 Technical data
Electrical connection diagram
Typical configuration
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance
to power cables > 5 cm
- Available heaters: see combination table
2 low voltage wires
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 4 high voltage wires
Control
Box
Control
Box
Power supply
1
Only for *DLQ*
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 4 high voltage wires
Inside: 6 or 7 wires to BUH
BUH
Standard part
Only for normal power supply installation
3 core
unit power supply: 230 V + earth
Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply:
3 core
230 V + earth
Valve kit
1
X4M: L-N-earth
Only for EKRSCA1
External outdoor thermistor
2 core
signal
X5M: 1-2
X5Y
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
X5M: 5-6
X5M: 3-4
2 core
2x0.75
Optional part
X3M: 3-4
X3M: 5-6
Optional
part
X3M: 1-2
2 core
normal kWh rate power supply for unit: 230 V
Only for *BLQ*
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 5 high voltage wires
Inside: 6 or 7 wires to BUH
Valve kit: 3 wires
BUH
Control
Box
Monobloc unit
Field supply
communication
2 core
2x0.75 2 core
2x0.75
communication
communication
Optional part
communication
2 core
230V
2 core
2 core 230V
230V
2 core
DHW pump
1 core
230V
230V
2 core
2 core
Shut-off valve
F1B: L1-L2-L3
or L-N + earth
X15M: 5-6-7
X2M: 20-21
X2M: 22-23
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
Main: X2M: 1-2
Add: X2M: 1a-2
2
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 or 3 core
signal
X2M: 1-2-1a
X2M: 5-6
X2M: 12-11
X2M: 13-14-15
Domestic hot
water tank
Booster heater
X8M: 8-9
X8M: 10
2
F2B: L-N + earth
X15M: 1-2
X15M: 3-4
X2M: 9-10
3 core
BUH option
4 or 3 core
Backup heater power supply (3/6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
X8M: 6-7-10
X8M: 6-7
230V
Booster heater power supply (3 kW): 230 V + earth
2
X2M: 1-2-1a
X8M: 4-5
2
X2M: 1-2
X8M: 6-7
X6M
or
X9M
5 core
5Gx2.5
Q2L/Q3L - clixon
booster heater
230 V
R5T - thermistor
water temperature
signal
Control box power supply: 230 V + earth
Power supply
230 V
3 core
Dual setpoint application
(refer to installation manual)
3 core
signal
3 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
signal
5 core for C/H operation
4 core for H only operation
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
230 V
A7P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
A3P: X1M: 1-3
2 core
(3m included)
signal
Only for *KRTETS
R2T
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
Only for
(heat pump convector)
4 core
230 V
X11M: 3-4-5-6
Field supply
Optional part
Field supply
Option box
X2M: 7-8
Power limitation
demand input 1
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 4
X2M: 3-4
X8M: 5-4-3
A4P: X5A: 1-2-3
X1M: L-N-PE
Optional part
A3P: X1M: C-com-H
X4M: 1-2-earth
3 way valve
M3S (when *KHW is installed)
selection domestic hot water-floor heating
Optional part
Only for *KRUCB*
A5P: P1-P2 user interface
Control box
Valve kit
Standard part
A5P: P1-P2 user interface
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
3 core
communication
3 core
230 V
X2M: 5-6
X2M: 13-15
X2M: 3-4
X8M: 3-4
X2M: 1-2
X8M: 1-2
X2M: 11-12
X2M: 7-8
A4P: X5A: 1-2-3
X1M: L-N-PE
X2M: 9-10
X2M: 1a-2a
2 core
signal
2 core
230 V
2 core
230 V
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
Alarm Output
Ext. heat source (eg boiler)
Space cooling/heating
On/OFF output
Electricity pulse
meter input 1
Electricity pulse
meter input 2
External indoor thermistor
Only for KRCS01-1
4D09752-1B
Installer reference guide
106
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.7
Technical specifications
14.7.1
Technical specifications: Outdoor unit
Nominal capacity and nominal input
Heating only type
Outdoor units
Reversible type
EDLQ05CAV3
EDLQ07CAV3
EBLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
Nominal
4.40 kW
7.00 kW
Maximum
5.00 kW
4.40 kW
7.00 kW
7.00 kW
5.00 kW
7.00 kW
2.00 kW
2.50 kW
3.90 kW
5.20 kW
0.88 kW
1.55 kW
0.95 kW
1.37 kW
5.00
4.52
4.07
3.80
Condition 1(a)
Heating capacity
Cooling capacity
Minimum
1.80 kW
Minimum
—
Nominal
—
Maximum
Heating PI
Nominal
Cooling PI
Nominal
COP
Nominal
EER
Nominal
—
0.88 kW
1.55 kW
—
5.00
4.52
—
Condition 2(b)
Heating capacity
Cooling capacity
Minimum
1.80 kW
Nominal
4.03 kW
6.90 kW
4.03 kW
6.90 kW
Maximum
4.75 kW
6.90 kW
4.75 kW
6.90 kW
2.00 kW
2.50 kW
4.20 kW
5.40 kW
1.13 kW
2.02 kW
1.80 kW
2.34 kW
3.58
3.42
2.32
2.29
Minimum
—
Nominal
—
Maximum
Heating PI
Nominal
Cooling PI
Nominal
COP
Nominal
EER
Nominal
(a)
(b)
—
1.13 kW
2.02 kW
—
3.58
3.42
—
In heating: Ambient temperature DB/WB 7°C/6°C – leaving water condenser 35°C (DT=5°C). In cooling: Ambient temperature 35°C – leaving
water evaporator 18°C (DT=5°C)
In heating: Ambient temperature DB/WB 7°C/6°C – leaving water condenser 45°C (DT=5°C). In cooling: Ambient temperature 35°C – leaving
water evaporator 7°C (DT=5°C)
Technical specifications
Outdoor units
EDLQ05CAV3
EDLQ07CAV3
EBLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
Casing
Colour
Ivory white
Material
Polyester painted galvanised steel plate
Dimensions
Packing (H×W×D)
880×1166×432 mm
Unit (H×W×D)
735×1085×350 mm
Weight
Machine weight
76 kg
80 kg
76 kg
80 kg
Gross weight
82 kg
86 kg
82 kg
86 kg
Packing
Material
EPS, carton, wood
Weight
6 kg
Heat exchanger
Specifications
Length
Nr. of rows
Fin pitch
Nr. of passes
845 mm
2
1.8 mm
—
Face area
—
Nr. of stages
32
Tube type
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Ø8 Hi-Xa
Installer reference guide
107
14 Technical data
Outdoor units
Fin
EDLQ05CAV3
EDLQ07CAV3
Type
EBLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
WF fin
Treatment
Anti-corrosion treatment
Fan
Type
Propeller fan
Quantity
Air flow rate (nominal at 230 V)
1
Heating
45.0 m³/min
47.0 m³/min
Cooling
Discharge direction
Motor
45.0 m³/min
47.0 m³/min
52.5 m³/min
Horizontal
Quantity
1
Output
53 W
Compressor
Quantity 2YC36BXD#C‑2YC45DXD#C
Motor
1
Model
2YC36BXD#C
Type
2YC45DXD#C
2YC36BXD#C
2YC45DXD#C
Hermetically sealed swing compressor
Output
—
PED
Category of unit
I (excluded from scope of PED due to article 1, item 3.6 of 97/23/EC)
Operation range (1)
Heating (outdoor unit)*
Minimum
–25°C DB
Maximum
Cooling (outdoor unit)
25°C DB
Minimum
—
10°C DB
Maximum
—
43°C DB
Domestic hot water (outdoor unit)** Minimum
–25°C DB
Maximum
35°C DB
Sound level
Nominal - Heating
Sound power
Sound pressure.
Nominal - Cooling
(2)
61 dBA
62 dBA
48 dBA
49 dBA
Sound power
62 dBA
48 dBA
49 dBA
48 dBA
50 dBA
1.30 kg
1.45 kg
63 dBA
Sound pressure
Night quiet
61 dBA
—
Sound pressure
—
Refrigerant
Type
R410A
Charge
1.30 kg
Control
1.45 kg
Expansion valve (electronic type)
Nr. of circuits
1
Refrigerant oil
Type
FVC50K
Charged volume
0.65 l
Defrost method
Reverse cycle
Defrost control
Sensor for outdoor heat exchanger temperature
Capacity control method
Inverter controlled
Electrical specifications
Outdoor units
EDLQ05CAV3
EDLQ07CAV3
EBLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
Power supply
Name
V3
Phase
1
Frequency
50 Hz
Voltage
230 V
Voltage range
Minimum
–10%
Maximum
+10%
Current
(1) See operation range drawing. *Range increase by support backup heater. **Range increase by support booster heater or backup heater.
(2) The sound pressure level is measured via a microphone at a certain distance from the unit. It is a relative value depending on the distance and acoustic environment. Refer to the
sound spectrum drawing for more information.
Installer reference guide
108
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
Outdoor units
EDLQ05CAV3
Nominal running current
EDLQ07CAV3
Cooling
EBLQ05CAV3
EBLQ07CAV3
—
Heating
Starting current
Cooling
15.7 A
18.0 A (see
Figure A)
15.7 A
18.0 A (see
Figure A)
15.7 A
18.0 A (see
Figure A)
15.7 A
18.0 A (see
Figure A)
Heating
Maximum running current
Cooling
Heating
Zmax
—
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12(1)
Minimum Ssc value
16 A
Recommended fuses
16 A
20 A
20 A
Wiring connections
For power supply
For connection with control box
Quantity
3
Remark
—
Quantity
8
Remark
2 wires: minimum cable section 0.75 mm², maximum length: 20 m; 2
wires: minimum cable section 0.75 mm², maximum length: 500 m; 4
wires: 230 V
Figure A: Starting current
Daikin inverter controlled compressor starting current always less
than or equal to maximal running current.
A
C
D
E
B
A
B
C
D
E
Running current
Time
Maximum
Example 1
Example 2
Standard on/off compressor starting current to maximum running
current
A
C
D
E
B
A
B
C
D
E
Running current
Time
Maximum
Example 1
Example 2
(1) European/International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A
per phase.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
109
14 Technical data
14.7.2
Technical specifications: Options
Technical specifications: control box and option box
Options
EKCB07CAV3+EK2CB07CAV3
Casing
Colour
White
Material
Precoated sheet metal
Dimensions
Packing (H×W×D)
406×392×136 mm
Unit (H×W×D)
360×340×97 mm
Weight
Machine weight
4 kg
Gross weight
5 kg
Packing
Material
Cardboard, EPS
Electrical specifications: control box and option box
Options
EKCB07CAV3+EK2CB07CAV3
Power supply
Phase
1
Frequency
50 Hz
Voltage
230 V
Voltage range
Minimum
–10%
Maximum
+10%
Fuses
Recommended fuses
16 A
Technical specifications: backup heater
Options
EKMBUHCA3V3
EKMBUHCA9W1
Casing
Colour
White
Material
Precoated sheet metal
Dimensions
Packing (H×W×D)
650×300×270 mm
Unit (H×W×D)
560×250×210 mm
Weight
Machine weight
11 kg
13 kg
Gross weight
12 kg
14 kg
Packing
Material
Cardboard, EPS
Electrical specifications: backup heater
Options
EKMBUHCA3V3
EKMBUHCA9W1
Name
3V3
9W
Phase
1
Refer to the "Configuration"
chapter
Power supply
Frequency
50 Hz
Voltage
Voltage range
230 V
Minimum
–10%
Maximum
+10%
Current
Running current
Installer reference guide
110
13 A
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.8
Operation range
14.8.1
Operation range: Heating and cooling
Space heating and cooling mode (for current models in this
manual)
Heating mode
Cooling mode
5+7 kW (with backup heater)
5+7 kW
A (°C DB)
A (°C DB)
43
25
18
10
-15
5
-20
13
22
-25
15 18
-15
25
50
C (°C)
45 50 55
B (°C)
5+7 kW (without backup heater)
A (°C DB)
25
-15
-20
-25
-15
10
A
B
C
25
45 50 55
B (°C)
Outdoor temperature
Leaving water condensor temperature
Leaving water evaporator temperature
Backup heater only operation. No outdoor unit operation.
Outdoor unit operation if setpoint ≥⁠25°C.
Heat pump + backup heater operation / Pull‑up operation
Pull‑up area. Outdoor unit operation if setpoint ≥⁠25°C.
Circulation pump
Operation of outdoor unit is possible, but with possible
capacity reduction. If the outdoor temperature <⁠–⁠25°C, the
outdoor unit will stop. Backup heater operation will
continue.
Pull-down area.
Remark: In restricted power supply mode, the outdoor unit, booster
heater, and backup heater can only operate separately.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
111
14 Technical data
14.8.2
Operation range: Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water heating mode (for current models in this
manual)
5 kW
7 kW
A (°C DB)
A (°C DB)
35
35
25
25
5
-15
-15
-20
-20
-25
-25
40 45 50 55
25
80
B (°C)
A
B
40 45 50 55
48
80
B (°C)
Outdoor temperature
Domestic hot water temperature
Booster heater only operation (EKHW only)
Operation of outdoor unit is possible, but with possible
capacity reduction. If the outdoor temperature <⁠–⁠25°C, the
outdoor unit will stop. Backup/booster heater operation will
continue.
Installer reference guide
112
25
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
14 Technical data
14.9
ESP curve
14.9.1
ESP curve: Outdoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
EDLQ05CAV3+EBLQ05CAV3
A (kPa)
80
70
60
50
40
30
C
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
20
25
30
35
40
B (l/min)
EDLQ07CAV3+EBLQ07CAV3
A (kPa)
80
70
60
50
40
C
30
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
35
40
B (l/min)
A
B
C
External static pressure
Water flow rate
Operation range
Notes:
▪ The operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in case the
unit operates with heat pump only, and the temperature of the flow
medium is sufficiently high. (This does not apply to start‑up
operation, defrost operation, and backup heater operation in case
a backup heater is installed.)
▪ About the dashed lines: the higher operation range limit is only
valid if the flow medium is water. If glycol is added to the system,
the limit is lower.
▪ Selecting a flow outside the operating area can damage the unit or
cause the unit to malfunction.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
Installer reference guide
113
15 Glossary
15
Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
Field supply
Equipment not made by Daikin that can be combined with
the product according to the instructions in the
accompanying documentation.
Installer reference guide
114
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1A – 2015.06
1/8
Field settings table
Applicable units
*BLQ05CAV3
*DLQ05CAV3
*BLQ07CAV3
*DLQ07CAV3
Notes
(*1) *B*
(*2) *D*
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
2/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
User settings
└─ Preset values
└─ Room temperature
7.4.1.1
Comfort (heating)
Range, step
Default value
R/W
7.4.1.2
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.1.3
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.1.4
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.1
[8-09]
└─ LWT main
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.2
[8-0A]
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.3
[8-07]
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.4
[8-08]
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.5
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.6
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.7
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.8
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.3.1
[6-0A]
└─ Tank temperature
Storage comfort
R/W
7.4.3.2
[6-0B]
Storage eco
R/W
7.4.3.3
[6-0C]
Reheat
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
21°C
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
19°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
24°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
26°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
40°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
-2°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
└─ Quiet level
7.4.4
7.4.5.1
7.4.5.2
7.4.5.3
[C-0C]
[D-0C]
[C-0D]
[D-0D]
[C-0E]
[D-0E]
└─ Electricity price
High
R/W
0: Level 1
1: Level 2
2: Level 3
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
Medium
R/W
Low
R/W
└─ Fuel price
7.4.6
└─ Set weather dependent
└─ Main
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.1.1
[1-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-01]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-02]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.1.2
[1-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-08]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-09]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
└─ Additional
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.2.1
[0-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-01]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-02]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.2.2
[0-04]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-05]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
Installer settings
└─ System layout
└─ Standard
Unit type
A.2.1.1
[E-00]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
8,0/kWh
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
35°C
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/O
A.2.1.2
[E-01]
Compressor type
R/O
A.2.1.3
[E-02]
Indoor software type
R/O
A.2.1.7
[C-07]
Unit control method
R/W
A.2.1.8
[7-02]
Number of LWT zones
R/W
A.2.1.9
[F-0D]
Pump operation mode
R/W
A.2.1.A
[E-04]
Power saving possible
R/O
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
0~5
2: Monobloc
0~1
0: 8
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
0: No
1: Yes
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
3/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
A.2.1.B
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
User interface location
R/W
Glycol present
R/W
A.2.1.C
[E-0D]
A.2.2.A
[D-02]
A.2.2.B
[C-08]
External sensor
R/W
A.2.2.E.1
[E-03]
└────────────────── Control box
Backup heater steps
R/W
A.2.2.E.2
[5-0D]
BUH type
R/W
A.2.2.E.3
[D-01]
Preferential kWh rate
R/W
A.2.2.E.4
[E-05]
DHW operation
R/W
└─ Options
DHW pump
R/W
A.2.2.E.5
[C-05]
Contact type main
R/W
A.2.2.E.6
[C-06]
Contact type add.
R/W
A.2.2.F.1
[C-02]
└────────────────── Option box
Ext. backup heat src
R/W
A.2.2.F.2
[C-09]
Alarm output
R/W
A.2.2.F.3
[D-08]
External kWh meter 1
R/W
A.2.2.F.4
[D-09]
External kWh meter 2
R/W
A.2.2.F.5
[C-08]
External sensor
R/W
A.2.2.F.6
[D-04]
PCC by digital inputs
R/W
A.2.3.1
[6-02]
A.2.3.2
[6-03]
BUH: step 1
R/W
A.2.3.3
[6-04]
BUH: step 2
R/W
A.3.1.1.1
Space operation
└─ LWT settings
└────────────────── Main
LWT setpoint mode
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.1
[9-01]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.2
[9-00]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.3
[9-03]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.4
[9-02]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.5
[8-05]
Modulated LWT
R/W
A.3.1.1.7
[9-0B]
Emitter type
R/W
└────────────────── Additional
LWT setpoint mode
R/W
└─ Capacities
Booster heater
A.3.1.2.1
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.1
[9-05]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.2
[9-06]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.3
[9-07]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.4
[9-08]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.3.1
[9-09]
└────────────────── Delta T source
Heating
R/W
A.3.1.3.2
[9-0A]
Cooling
R/W
A.3.2.1.1
[3-07]
└─ Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.2.1.2
[3-06]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.2.1.3
[3-09]
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.2.1.4
[3-08]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.2.2
[2-0A]
Room temp. offset
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: At unit
1: In room
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
0~5
1: 1P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2)
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
0: No
1: Yes
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0~2
1: Thermo ON/OFF
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: 0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: No
1: Yes
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: Quick
1: Slow
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
16°C
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
4/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.3.2.3
[2-09]
Ext. room sensor offset
R/W
Room temp. step
R/W
A.3.2.4
A.3.3.1
A.3.3.2
A.4.1
[4-02]
[F-01]
Range, step
Default value
└─ Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
R/W
Space cooling On temp
R/W
└─ Domestic hot water (DHW)
└─ Type
[6-0D]
└─ Disinfection
Disinfection
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: 0,5 °C
1: 1 °C
14~35 °C, step: 1°C
25°C
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
R/W
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
A.4.4.1
[2-01]
A.4.4.2
[2-00]
Operation day
R/W
A.4.4.3
[2-02]
Start time
R/W
A.4.4.4
[2-03]
Temperature target
R/W
A.4.4.5
[2-04]
Duration
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
└─ Maximum setpoint
A.4.5
[6-0E]
R/W
40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
R/W
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
└─ SP mode
A.4.6
A.4.7
[0-0B]
└─ Weather dependent curve
Weather-dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0C]
Weather-dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0D]
[0-0E]
A.4.7
A.5.1.1
A.5.1.4
A.6.1
R/W
Weather-dependent curve
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
└─ Heat sources
└─ Backup heater
Operation mode
[4-00]
R/W
R/W
Emergency
R/W
[4-07]
Enable BUH step 2
R/W
[5-01]
Equilibrium temp.
R/W
A.5.1.2
A.5.1.3
Weather-dependent curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
└─ System operation
└─ Auto restart
[3-00]
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: No
1: Yes
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
-4°C
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
└─ Preferential kWh rate
Allowed heaters
R/W
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: Forced off
1: As normal
A.6.2.1
[D-00]
A.6.2.2
[D-05]
Forced pump OFF
R/W
A.6.3.1
[4-08]
└─ Pwr consumpt. Control
Mode
R/W
A.6.3.2
[4-09]
Type
R/W
A.6.3.3
[5-05]
Amp. value
R/W
A.6.3.4
[5-09]
kW value
R/W
A.6.3.5.1
[5-05]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
A.6.3.5.2
[5-06]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.5.3
[5-07]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.5.4
[5-08]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.6.1
[5-09]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
A.6.3.6.2
[5-0A]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.6.3
[5-0B]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.6.4
[5-0C]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.7
[4-01]
Priority
A.6.4
[1-0A]
A.6.5
[2-0B]
R/W
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
└─ Averaging time
R/W
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
└─ Ext amb. sensor offset
└─ Boiler efficiency
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
5/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
A.6.A
[7-05]
A.8
Setting name
└─ Overview settings
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
[0-00]
Range, step
Default value
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
35°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0: No
1: Yes
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
4~16°C, step: 1°C
16°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
4
2
1
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
16°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C
0: Limited
1: No limit
2: Most optimum
3: Optimum
A.8
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-04]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-04]
Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone.
R/W
A.8
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone
R/W
A.8
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-0A]
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
R/W
A.8
[2-00]
When should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
A.8
[2-01]
Should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
A.8
[2-02]
When should the disinfection function start?
R/W
A.8
[2-03]
What is the disinfection target temperature?
R/W
A.8
[2-04]
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
R/W
A.8
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-06]
Room frost protection
R/W
A.8
[2-09]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0A]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0B]
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
R/W
A.8
[3-00]
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[3-01]
[3-02]
[3-03]
[3-04]
[3-05]
[3-06]
-----What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-07]
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-08]
What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[3-09]
What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[4-00]
What is the BUH operation mode?
R/W
A.8
[4-01]
Which electric heater has priority?
R/W
A.8
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
A.8
[4-03]
Operation permission of the booster heater.
R/W
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
6/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[4-04]
How to protect the water pipes from freezing
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[4-05]
[4-06]
[4-07]
--- (Do not change this value)
Enable the second step of the backup heater?
R/W
A.8
[4-08]
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
R/W
A.8
[4-09]
Which power limitation type is required?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[4-0A]
[4-0B]
-Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[4-0D]
Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset.
R/W
A.8
[4-0E]
Is the installer on site?
R/W
A.8
[5-00]
R/W
A.8
[5-01]
Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
A.8
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
R/W
A.8
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
R/W
A.8
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
R/W
A.8
[5-05]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-06]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-07]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-08]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-09]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-0A]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-0B]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-0C]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-0D]
What type of backup heater installation is used?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[5-0E]
[6-00]
-The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
R/W
A.8
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
R/W
A.8
[6-02]
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
R/W
A.8
[6-03]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
R/W
A.8
[6-04]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[6-05]
[6-06]
[6-07]
[6-08]
---What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[6-09]
[6-0A]
-What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0B]
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0C]
What is the desired reheat temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0D]
What is the desired DHW production type?
R/W
A.8
[6-0E]
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
R/W
A.8
[7-00]
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[7-01]
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[7-02]
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[7-03]
[7-04]
[7-05]
--Boiler efficiency
R/W
A.8
A.8
[8-00]
[8-01]
-Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
R/W
A.8
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
R/W
A.8
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
R/W
A.8
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
R/W
A.8
[8-05]
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
R/W
A.8
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
R/W
A.8
[8-07]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[8-08]
What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling?
R/W
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
Range, step
Default value
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Continuous pump operation
1: Intermittent pump operation
2: No protection
0
0/1
0: No
1: Yes
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
-4°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~5
1: 1P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2)
1
2~20°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW
0
0
0
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
2,5
0
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
3 hour
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
7/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[8-09]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
[8-0A]
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[8-0B]
[8-0C]
[8-0D]
[9-00]
---What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-01]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-02]
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-03]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-04]
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[9-05]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-06]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-07]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-08]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-09]
What is the desired delta T in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-0A]
What is the desired delta T in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-0B]
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
R/W
A.8
[9-0C]
Room temperature hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[9-0D]
Pump speed limitation
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[9-0E]
[A-00]
[A-01]
[A-02]
[A-03]
[A-04]
[B-00]
[B-01]
[B-02]
[B-03]
[B-04]
[C-00]
[C-01]
[C-02]
-------------Is an external backup heat source connected?
R/W
A.8
[C-03]
Bivalent activation temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-04]
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-05]
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-06]
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-07]
What is the unit control method in space operation?
R/W
A.8
[C-08]
Which type of external sensor is installed?
R/W
A.8
[C-09]
What is the required alarm output contact type?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[C-0A]
[C-0C]
-High electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0D]
Medium electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0E]
Low electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-00]
Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
[D-01]
Contact type of preferential kWh rate PS installation?
R/W
A.8
[D-02]
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
R/W
A.8
[D-03]
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
R/W
A.8
[D-04]
Is the option box used for PCC ?
R/W
A.8
[D-05]
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[D-07]
[D-08]
-Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
40°C
13
10
16
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: Quick
1: Slow
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
0~8, step:1
0 : 100%
1~4 : 80~50%
5~8 : 80~50%
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: -25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0~2
0: 1: Thermo ON/OFF
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -2 to 2°C)
2: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -2 to 2°C)
3: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -4 to 4°C)
4: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -4 to 4°C)
0: No
1: Yes
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
8/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[D-09]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[D-0A]
[D-0B]
[D-0C]
--What is the high electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0D]
What is the medium electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0E]
What is the low electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[E-00]
Which type of unit is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-01]
Which type of compressor is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-02]
What is the indoor unit software type?
R/O
A.8
[E-03]
What is the number of backup heater steps?
R/W
A.8
[E-04]
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
R/O
A.8
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[E-06]
[E-07]
[E-08]
--Power saving function for outdoor unit.
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[E-09]
[E-0A]
[E-0B]
[E-0C]
[E-0D]
----Is the system filled with glycol ?
R/W
A.8
[F-00]
Pump operation allowed outside range.
R/W
A.8
[F-01]
Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[F-02]
[F-03]
[F-04]
[F-05]
[F-06]
[F-09]
-----Pump operation during flow abnormality.
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[F-0A]
[F-0B]
[F-0C]
[F-0D]
---What is the pump operation mode?
R/W
4P405542-1 - 2015.03
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0
2
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~5
2: Monobloc
0~1
0: 8
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0
0
0
0: No
1: Yes
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
3
5
0
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0
1
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
4P405544-1A 2015.06
Copyright 2015 Daikin
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising